2017 Supplemental SM FLHXSE

FLHXSE MODELS
2017 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SERVICE

MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
XXXXXXXXXXX
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Harley-Davidson motorcycles conform to all applicable U.S.A. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
and U.S.A. Environmental Protection Agency regulations effective on the date of manufacture.
To maintain the safety, dependability, and emission and noise control performance, it is essential that
the procedures, specifications and service instructions in this manual are followed.
Any substitution, alteration or adjustment of emission system and noise control components outside of
factory specifications may be prohibited by law.
Harley-Davidson Motor Company

2017 Harley-Davidson
FLHXSE Model
Service Manual Supplement
©2016 H-D
AL L RIGHTS RESERVED
94000390
Printed in the U.S.A.
VISIT THE HARLE Y-DAVIDSON WEB SITE

http://ww w.harley-davidson.com
Blank Text Here
READER COMMENTS
The Harley-Davidson Service Communications Department maintains a continuous effort to improve the quality
and usefulness of its publications. To do this effectively, we need user feedback - your critical evaluation of
this manual.
Please comment on the completeness, accuracy, organization, usability, and readability of this manual.
Please list the page, item, and part number(s) of any errors you find in this manual.
Please tell us how we can improve this manual.
Occupation:
Name: Dealer ship:
Street: Depar tment:
City: State: Zip:
Please clip out and mail to:

Service Communications Department
Harley-Davidson Motor Company
P.O. Box 653
Milwaukee, WI USA 53201
Blank Text Here
FOREWORD
GENERAL In figure legends, the number following the name of a part
indicates the quantity necessary for one complete assembly.
This service manual supplement has been designed to be used PREPARATION FOR SERVICE
with the current service manual. It has been prepared with two
purposes in mind.
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
• It will acquaint the user with the Harley-Davidson product HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II
and assist in the performance of basic maintenance and
repair. WARNING
• It provides the latest field-tested and factory-approved repair
Stop the engine when refueling or servicing the fuel
methods.
system. Do not smoke or allow open flame or sparks near
We sincerely believe that this service manual supplement will gasoline. Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly
make your association with Harley-Davidson products more explosive, which could result in death or serious injury.
pleasant and profitable. (00002a)
NOTE Good preparation is very important for efficient service work.

This service manual supplement provides information unique Start each job with a clean work area. This will allow the repair
to this model motorcycle. Any information not presented in this to proceed as smoothly as possible. It will also reduce the
supplement can be found in the appropriate service manual or incidence of misplaced tools and parts.
electrical diagnostic manual. Refer to Table 1.
Clean a motorcycle that is excessively dirty before work starts.
Cleaning will occasionally uncover sources of trouble. Gather
Table 1. Relevant Model Year Publications any tools, instruments and any parts needed for the job before
PUBLICATION PART NUMBER work begins. Interrupting a job to locate tools or parts is a
distraction and causes needless delay.
Touring Models Service Manual 94000383
FOREWORD
Touring Models Electrical Diagnostic 94000395 NOTE
Manual • To avoid unnecessary disassembly, carefully read all related
service information before repair work begins.
HOW TO USE YOUR SERVICE MANUAL • In figure legends, the number which follows the name of a
SUPPLEMENT part indicates the quantity necessary for one complete
assembly.
Use the TABLE OF CONTENTS (which follows this • When servicing a vehicle equipped with the Harley-Davidson
FOREWORD) and the INDEX (at the back of this manual) to Smart Security System (H-DSSS), first disarm the system.
quickly locate subjects. Sections and topics in this manual are Keep the fob close to the vehicle or use DIGITAL
sequentially numbered for easy navigation. TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650) to disable
the system. Activate the system after service is completed.
NUMBER CHAPTER
1 Maintenance
SERVICE BULLETINS
2 Chassis In addition to the information presented in this service manual
3 Engine supplement and the appropriate service manual,
4 Fuel System Harley-Davidson Motor Company will periodically issue Service
Bulletins to Harley-Davidson dealers. Service bulletins cover
5 Drive interim engineering changes and supplementary information.
6 Transmission Consult the service bulletins to keep your product knowledge
current and complete.
7 Electrical
A Appendix A Wiring USE GENUINE REPLACEMENT PARTS
B Appendix B Reference
WARNING
For example, a cross-reference shown as 2.1
Harley-Davidson parts and accessories are designed for
SPECIFICATIONS refers to chapter 2 CHASSIS, heading 2.1
Harley-Davidson motorcycles. Using non-Harley-Davidson
SPECIFICATIONS.
parts or accessories can adversely affect performance,
If the subject you seek is not in this supplement, refer to the stability or handling, which could result in death or serious
corresponding chapter in the appropriate service manual. injury. (00001b)
Check the title page located in the front of each chapter to find
the subject. To achieve satisfactory and lasting repairs, carefully follow the
service manual instructions and use only genuine
For quick and easy reference, all pages contain a chapter Harley-Davidson replacement parts. Behind the emblem
number followed by a page number. For example, page 3-5 bearing the words GENUINE HARLEY-DAVIDSON stand more
refers to page 5 in chapter 3. than 100 years of design, research, manufacturing, testing and
94000390 I
inspecting experience. This is your assurance that the parts When reference is made in this manual to a specific brand
you are using will fit right, operate properly and last longer. name product, tool or instrument, an equivalent product, tool
or instrument may be substituted.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Special Tools
Statements in this manual preceded by the following words
are of special significance. All tools mentioned in this manual with a part number beginning
with "HD", "J" or "B" must be ordered through your local
WARNING Harley-Davidson dealer. Special tools may only be purchased,
serviced or warrantied through a Harley-Davidson dealer.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious LOCTITE Sealing and Threadlocking Products
injury. (00119a)
Some procedures in this manual call for the use of LOCTITE
CAUTION products. If you have any questions regarding LOCTITE product
usage or retailer/wholesaler locations, contact Loctite Corp. at
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
www.loctite.com.
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
(00139a) PRODUCT REGISTERED MARKS
NOTICE
Apple, Alcantara S.p.A., Allen, Amp Multilock, Bluetooth,
NOTICE indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, Brembo, City Navigator, Delphi, Deutsch, Dunlop, Dynojet,
if not avoided, may result in property damage. (00140b) Fluke, G.E. Versilube, Garmin, Gunk, Hydroseal, Hylomar,
iPhone, iPod, Kevlar, Lexan, Loctite, Lubriplate, Keps, K&N,
NOTE
Magnaflux, Marson Thread-Setter Tool Kit, MAXI fuse, Molex,
Refers to important information. It is recommended that you
Michelin, MPZ, Mulitilock, nano, NGK, Novus, Packard, Pirelli,
take special notice of these items.
Permatex, Philips, PJ1, Pozidriv, Road Tech, Robinair, S100,
Sems, SiriusXM, Snap-on, Teflon, Threadlocker, Torca, Torco,
Proper service and repair are important for the safe, reliable TORX, Tufoil, Tyco, Ultratorch, Velcro, X-Acto and XM Satellite
operation of all mechanical products. The service procedures Radio are among the trademarks of their respective owners.
recommended and described in this manual are effective
methods for performing service operations. H-D U.S.A., LLC TRADEMARK
INFORMATION
WARNING
Always wear proper eye protection when using hammers, Bar & Shield, Boom!, Cross Bones, Cruise Drive, CVO, Digital
arbor or hydraulic presses, gear pullers, spring Tech, Digital Technician, Digital Technician II, Dyna, Electra
compressors, slide hammers and similar tools. Flying Glide, Evolution, Fat Bob, Fat Boy, Forty-Eight, Glaze, Gloss,
parts could result in death or serious injury. (00496b) H-D, H-Dnet.com, Harley, Harley-Davidson, HD, Heritage
Softail, Iron 883, Low Rider, Milwaukee-Eight, Night Rod,
Some of these service operations require the use of tools Nightster, Night Train, Profile, Reflex, Revolution, Road Glide,
specially designed for the purpose. These special tools should Road King, Road Tech, Rocker, Screamin' Eagle, Seventy-Two,
be used when and as recommended. It is important to note Softail, Sportster, Street Glide, Street Rod, Sun Ray, Sunwash,
that some warnings against the use of specific service methods, Super Glide, SuperLow, Supersmart, Switchback, SYN3,
which could damage the motorcycle or render it unsafe, are TechLink, TechLink II, Tour-Pak, Tri Glide, Twin Cam 88, Twin
stated in this manual. However, remember that these warnings Cam 88B, Twin Cam 96, Twin Cam 96B, Twin Cam 103, Twin
are not all-inclusive. Inadequate safety precautions could result Cam 103B, Twin Cam 110, Twin Cam 110B, Twin-Cooled,
in death or serious injury. Ultra Classic, V-Rod, VRSC and Harley-Davidson Genuine
Motor Parts and Genuine Motor Accessories are among the
Since Harley-Davidson could not possibly know, evaluate or trademarks of H-D U.S.A., LLC.
advise the service trade of all possible ways in which service
might be performed, or of the possible hazardous CONTENTS
consequences of each method, we have not undertaken any
such broad evaluation. Accordingly, anyone who uses a service All photographs, illustrations and procedures may not
procedure or tool which is not recommended by necessarily depict the most current model or component, but
Harley-Davidson must first thoroughly satisfy himself that are based on the latest production information available at the
neither his nor the operator's safety will be jeopardized as a time of publication.
result. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
Since product improvement is our continual goal,
PRODUCT REFERENCES Harley-Davidson reserves the right to change specifications,
equipment or designs at any time without notice and without
WARNING incurring obligation.
Read and follow warnings and directions on all products.

Failure to follow warnings and directions can result in
death or serious injury. (00470b)
II 94000390
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE 2.7 HANDLEBAR
Removal and Installation..................................................2-12
1.1 FASTENER TORQUE VALUES 2.8 HAND GRIPS
Fastener Torque Values in this Chapter..............................1-1
Left Hand Grip..................................................................2-13
1.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Removal......................................................................2-13
Installation...................................................................2-13
General...............................................................................1-2
Right Hand Grip................................................................2-14
Disposal and Recycling.................................................1-2
Removal......................................................................2-14
1.3 AIR FILTER ELEMENT Installation...................................................................2-14
General...............................................................................1-5 2.9 SEAT
Remove..............................................................................1-5
Seat and Pillion.................................................................2-15
Install..................................................................................1-5
Pillion Removal...........................................................2-15
1.4 LUBRICANTS Pillion Installation........................................................2-15
Rider Seat Removal....................................................2-15
Change and Check Lubricants...........................................1-6
Rider Seat Installation.................................................2-15
1.5 REAR SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENTS 2.10 REAR FASCIA
Manual Suspension Preload...............................................1-7
Removal............................................................................2-16
CHASSIS Installation.........................................................................2-16
2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET
2.1 FASTENER TORQUE VALUES ASSEMBLY
Fastener Torque Values in this Chapter..............................2-1 Removal............................................................................2-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Installation.........................................................................2-17
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS: CHASSIS
General...............................................................................2-2
2.12 REAR FENDER
Preparing Motorcycle........................................................2-18
2.3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Removal............................................................................2-18
(VIN) Installation.........................................................................2-18
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....................................2-4 Final Assembly.................................................................2-18
General.........................................................................2-4 Seat Pad Replacement.....................................................2-18
Location........................................................................2-4
Abbreviated VIN............................................................2-4
2.13 SADDLEBAGS
Remove............................................................................2-19
2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS Install................................................................................2-19
Rider Footboards................................................................2-6 Latch Handle Removal and Installation............................2-20
Removal........................................................................2-6
Installation.....................................................................2-6
2.14 MUFFLER END CAP
Disassembly..................................................................2-6 Replacement.....................................................................2-21
Assembly......................................................................2-6
Shift Levers.........................................................................2-7
ENGINE
Replace Pegs................................................................2-7
Replace Heel-Toe Shift Levers.....................................2-7 3.1 SPECIFICATIONS: ENGINE
Rear Brake Pedal Pad........................................................2-7
General...............................................................................3-1
Passenger Footrests...........................................................2-8
Manufacturing Tolerances..................................................3-1
Remove Rubber and Chrome Cover............................2-8
Install and Adjust...........................................................2-8 3.2 SERVICE WEAR LIMITS
Remove Footrest and Support......................................2-8
General...............................................................................3-2
Install Support and Footrest..........................................2-8
2.5 WHEELS 3.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
General...............................................................................3-3
Front Wheel Service...........................................................2-9
Disc Replacement.........................................................2-9 FUEL SYSTEM
Wheel Installation..........................................................2-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........................2-9
General.........................................................................2-9 4.1 FASTENER TORQUE VALUES
Remove Sensor............................................................2-9 Fastener Torque Values in this Chapter..............................4-1
Install Sensor................................................................2-9
Tire Replacement........................................................2-10 4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
General...............................................................................4-2
2.6 FRONT AXLE COVERS Remove..............................................................................4-2
Replacement.....................................................................2-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS III

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Install..................................................................................4-2 XM Antenna and Bracket....................................................7-9
Remove.........................................................................7-9
DRIVE Installation.....................................................................7-9
XM Radio Activation.........................................................7-10
5.1 SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE Rider Headset Connector.................................................7-10
Removal......................................................................7-10
General...............................................................................5-1
Installation...................................................................7-10
Lubricant.......................................................................5-1
Ratios............................................................................5-1 7.10 AUDIO AMPLIFIER
5.2 CLUTCH Amplifier Removal.............................................................7-11
Installation.........................................................................7-11
Clutch Repair......................................................................5-2
7.11 PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM
TRANSMISSION
Front Fairing Speakers.....................................................7-13
Tweeter and Midrange Speaker Removal...................7-13
6.1 SPECIFICATIONS: TRANSMISSION Tweeter and Midrange Speaker Installation................7-13
General...............................................................................6-1 Saddlebag Speakers........................................................7-13
Removal......................................................................7-13
ELECTRICAL Installation...................................................................7-13
Rear Amplifier...................................................................7-13
7.1 FASTENER TORQUE VALUES Removal......................................................................7-13
Installation...................................................................7-14
Fastener Torque Values in this Chapter..............................7-1 Saddlebag Audio Harness Removal and Installation.......7-14
7.2 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION Left Saddlebag Harness.............................................7-14
Right Saddlebag Harness...........................................7-15
Fuses and Relays...............................................................7-2
7.12 POWER LOCKS
7.3 FUEL TANK CONSOLE LAMP
Actuator: Saddlebag.........................................................7-16
Lighted Fuel Tank Emblem.................................................7-3 Remove.......................................................................7-16
Removal........................................................................7-3 Install...........................................................................7-16
Installation.....................................................................7-3 KEY FOB..........................................................................7-17
Console Insert...............................................................7-3 Power Locks...............................................................7-18
7.4 LED TURN SIGNAL LAMPS Security System..........................................................7-18
Replacing the Battery..................................................7-18
LED Assembly....................................................................7-4 Relay Bracket...................................................................7-18
Remove.........................................................................7-4 Removal......................................................................7-18
Install.............................................................................7-4 Installation...................................................................7-19
7.5 REAR LIGHTING 7.13 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS
Rear Fascia Lamp..............................................................7-5 Description and Operation................................................7-20
Removal........................................................................7-5 Symptoms.........................................................................7-22
Installation.....................................................................7-5
Tail Lamp Lens: Canadian Models.....................................7-5 7.14 NO VEHICLE POWER, DTC U0140
Removal........................................................................7-5 Description and Operation................................................7-24
Installation.....................................................................7-5 Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-24
7.6 FORK LOCK Connector Information................................................7-24
No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140........................................7-26
Fork Lock............................................................................7-6 1. BCM Ground Test...................................................7-26
Removal........................................................................7-6 2. CAN High Circuit Continuity Test............................7-26
Installation.....................................................................7-6 3. CAN High Circuit Short to Ground Test...................7-26
7.7 DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES 4. CAN High Circuit Short to Voltage Test...................7-26
5. CAN Low Circuit Continuity Test.............................7-26
Remove..............................................................................7-7 6. CAN Low Circuit Short to Ground Test...................7-26
Installation...........................................................................7-7 7. CAN Low Circuit Short to Voltage Test...................7-26
7.8 RADIO SOFTWARE UPDATE 8. RHCM Power Test..................................................7-26
9. RHCM Ground Test.................................................7-26
General...............................................................................7-8 10. RHCM Test............................................................7-27
Updating Radio Software....................................................7-8 11. BCM Voltage Test..................................................7-27
7.9 RADIO 7.15 POWER LOCK DIAGNOSTICS
General...............................................................................7-9 Description and Operation................................................7-28
Hidden Antenna..................................................................7-9 Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-30
XM Satellite Radio Module.................................................7-9 Connector Information................................................7-30
TABLE OF CONTENTS IV
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DTC B2188.......................................................................7-31 3. Power Circuit Open Test.........................................7-38
1. Unlock Relay Circuit Short to Ground Test.............7-31 4. Left Turn Signal Test...............................................7-39
2. Unlock Relay Test...................................................7-31 DTC B2153, B2154...........................................................7-39
3. BCM Test................................................................7-31 1. Left Rear Turn Power Circuit Short to Ground
4. Wiggle Test.............................................................7-31 Test..............................................................................7-39
DTC B2193.......................................................................7-31 2. Power Circuit Short to Ground Test........................7-39
1. Lock Relay Circuit Short to Ground Test.................7-31 3. High Current Test....................................................7-39
2. Lock Relay Test.......................................................7-31 DTC B2156.......................................................................7-39
3. BCM Test................................................................7-31 1. Short to Voltage Test...............................................7-39
4. Wiggle Test.............................................................7-32 2. Ground Circuit Open Test.......................................7-39
DTC B2231.......................................................................7-32 3. Power Circuit Open Test.........................................7-39
1. Fork Lock Switch Feed Circuit Test.........................7-32 4. Right Turn Signal Test.............................................7-40
2. Fork Lock to BCM Test............................................7-32 DTC B2158, B2159...........................................................7-40
3. Wiggle Test.............................................................7-32 1. Right Rear Turn Power Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B2233.......................................................................7-32 Test..............................................................................7-40
1. Fork Lock Switch Circuit Short to Ground Test.......7-32 2. Power Circuit Short to Ground Test........................7-40
2. Fork Lock Switch Test.............................................7-32 3. High Current Test....................................................7-40
3. Fork Lock Switch Circuit Open Test........................7-32
4. Wiggle Test.............................................................7-33
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS
5. DTC Test.................................................................7-33 Description and Operation................................................7-41
Power Locks Inoperative..................................................7-33 Conditions for Setting..................................................7-41
1. System Test............................................................7-33 Connector Information................................................7-42
2. Fob Battery Test......................................................7-33 Stop Lamp Inoperative......................................................7-42
3. Fob Programming Test............................................7-33 1. Stop Lamp Switch Test...........................................7-42
4. Lock Test.................................................................7-33 2. Brake Switch Test...................................................7-43
5. Fork Lock Switch Unlock Resistance Test..............7-33 3. Brake Switch Ground Test......................................7-43
6. Fork Lock Switch Lock Resistance Test..................7-33 4. Brake Switch Input Test..........................................7-43
7. Left Saddlebag Unlock Resistance Test.................7-33 5. RHCM Test..............................................................7-43
8. Left Saddlebag Lock Resistance Test.....................7-34 6. DTC Test.................................................................7-43
9. Right Saddlebag Unlock Resistance Test...............7-34 Stop Lamp Always On, DTC B2223.................................7-43
10. Right Saddlebag Lock Resistance Test................7-34 1. Brake Switch Test...................................................7-43
11. Relay Test..............................................................7-34 2. Brake Switch Input Test..........................................7-43
12. P&A Power Resistance Test.................................7-34 3. Stop Lamp Power Test............................................7-43
13. Relay Grounds Resistance Test............................7-34 4. DTC Test.................................................................7-43
14. Relay Lock Signal Shorted High Test....................7-34 DTC B2161.......................................................................7-44
15. Relay Unlock Signal Shorted High Test................7-34 1. Stop Lamp Bulb Test...............................................7-44
16. RF Antenna Test...................................................7-34 2. Stop Lamp Test.......................................................7-44
Power Locks Dash Switch Inoperative.............................7-34 3. Circuit Board Test....................................................7-44
1. Verify Dash Switches Test.......................................7-35 4. Stop Lamp Circuit Test............................................7-44
2. P&A Relay Power Resistance Test.........................7-35 5. Power Circuit Open Test.........................................7-44
3. P&A Relay System Power Test...............................7-35 6. Stop Lamp Circuit Test............................................7-44
4. P&A Relay Ground Test..........................................7-35 7. Stop Lamp Ground Circuit Test...............................7-44
5. Relay Test...............................................................7-35 8. Power Circuit Open Test.........................................7-44
6. P&A Relay Output Resistance Test........................7-35 9. Power Circuit Open Test.........................................7-45
7. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Resistance Test.........7-35 10. Stop Lamp Signal LED Test..................................7-45
8. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Shorted Low Test.......7-35 DTC B2163, B2164...........................................................7-45
9. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Shorted High Test......7-35 1. Bulb Test.................................................................7-45
10. Lock Circuit Shorted High Test..............................7-35 2. Stop Lamp Power Circuit Short to Ground Test......7-45
11. Unlock Circuit Shorted High Test..........................7-35 3. High Current Test....................................................7-45
12. Power Lock Switch Unlock Test............................7-36
13. Dash Switch Unlock Circuit Shorted Low Test......7-36 7.18 RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS
14. Dash Switch Unlock Circuit Open Test.................7-36 Description and Operation................................................7-46
15. Power Lock Switch Lock Test...............................7-36 Conditions for Setting..................................................7-47
16. Dash Switch Lock Circuit Shorted Low Test.........7-36 Connector Information................................................7-47
17. Dash Switch Lock Circuit Open Test.....................7-36 Running Lamps Inoperative..............................................7-48
18. IM Test..................................................................7-36 1. Running Lamp Test.................................................7-48
2. General Lamp Test..................................................7-48
7.16 REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS 3. Single Lamp Power Test.........................................7-48
Description and Operation................................................7-37 4. Running Lamp Circuit Test......................................7-48
Conditions for Setting..................................................7-37 DTC B2168, B2169...........................................................7-49
Connector Information................................................7-37 1. Rear Running Lamps Circuit Test...........................7-49
DTC B2151.......................................................................7-38 2. BCM Test................................................................7-49
1. Short to Voltage Test...............................................7-38 3. High Current Test....................................................7-49
2. Ground Circuit Open Test.......................................7-38 License Plate Lamp Inoperative.......................................7-49
TABLE OF CONTENTS V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. License Plate Lamp Circuit Test..............................7-49 8. Reset Test...............................................................7-58
2. License Plate Lamp Circuit Test..............................7-49 DTC B1345.......................................................................7-58
1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-58
7.19 BACKLIT HAND CONTROLS 2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-59
INOPERATIVE 3. [2A] Test..................................................................7-59
Description and Operation................................................7-50 4. Reset Test...............................................................7-59
Backlit Hand Control Buttons Inoperative.........................7-50 DTC B1347.......................................................................7-59
1. (PK) Circuit Grounded Test.....................................7-59
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS 2. Amplifier Terminal 22 Test.......................................7-59
Description and Operation................................................7-51 3. [2B] Terminal 9 Test................................................7-59
Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-52 4. (PK/BK) Circuit Grounded Test...............................7-59
DTC C0077.......................................................................7-52 5. [2B] Terminal 10 Test..............................................7-59
1. Security System Test..............................................7-52 6. Reset Test...............................................................7-59
2. Tire Pressure Test...................................................7-52 DTC B1348.......................................................................7-60
DTCs C2000, C2001, C2003, C2004...............................7-52 1. (PK) Circuit Voltage Test.........................................7-60
1. Security System Test..............................................7-53 2. Amplifier Terminal 22 Test.......................................7-60
2. Calibration Test.......................................................7-53 3. [2B] Terminal 9 Test................................................7-60
3. Assigning Pressure Sensors Test...........................7-53 4. [27A] Terminal M1 Voltage Test..............................7-60
DTCs C2006, C2007........................................................7-53 5. (PK/BK) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-60
1. Security System Test..............................................7-53 6. [2B] Terminal 10 Test..............................................7-60
2. Assigning Pressure Sensors Test...........................7-53 7. [27A] Terminal M2 Voltage Test..............................7-60
8. Reset Test...............................................................7-60
7.21 AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS DTC B1341.......................................................................7-61
Description and Operation................................................7-54 1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-61
Conditions for Setting..................................................7-54 2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-61
Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-54 3. [288] Test................................................................7-61
Connector Information................................................7-54 4. [162] Test................................................................7-61
DTC B1401.......................................................................7-55 5. Reset Test...............................................................7-61
1. Battery Test.............................................................7-55 DTC B1343.......................................................................7-61
2. Charging System Test.............................................7-55 1. (LBE/GY) Circuit Grounded Test.............................7-62
3. Amplifier Battery Voltage 9 Test..............................7-55 2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-62
4. Amplifier Battery Voltage 16 Test............................7-55 3. [288] Terminal 12 Test.............................................7-62
5. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop 9 Test.....................7-55 4. [162] Terminal 2 Test...............................................7-62
6. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop 16 Test...................7-55 5. (LBE/O) Circuit Grounded Test...............................7-62
7. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop Test........................7-55 6. [288] Terminal 3 Test...............................................7-62
8. Amplifier DTC Test..................................................7-55 7. [162] Terminal 1 Test...............................................7-62
DTC B1402.......................................................................7-55 8. Reset Test...............................................................7-62
1. Charging System Test.............................................7-55 DTC B1344.......................................................................7-62
2. Repair Validation Test.............................................7-55 1. (LBE/GY) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-62
2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-63
7.22 RADIO DIAGNOSTICS 3. [288] Terminal 12 Test.............................................7-63
Description and Operation................................................7-56 4. [162] Terminal 2 Test...............................................7-63
Connector Information................................................7-56 5. [27] Terminal H1 Voltage Test.................................7-63
DTC B1337.......................................................................7-56 6. (LBE/O) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-63
1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-56 7. [288] Terminal 3 Test...............................................7-63
2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-56 8. [162] Terminal 1 Test...............................................7-63
3. [2A] Test..................................................................7-56 9. [27] Terminal J1 Voltage Test..................................7-63
4. Reset Test...............................................................7-56 10. Reset Test.............................................................7-64
DTC B1339.......................................................................7-57 DTC B1349.......................................................................7-64
1. (PK/GY) Circuit Grounded Test...............................7-57 1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-64
2. Amplifier Terminal 20 Test.......................................7-57 2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-64
3. [2B] Terminal 12 Test..............................................7-57 3. [288] Test................................................................7-64
4. (PK/O) Circuit Grounded Test.................................7-57 4. [162] Test................................................................7-64
5. [2B] Terminal 11 Test...............................................7-57 5. Reset Test...............................................................7-64
6. Reset Test...............................................................7-57 DTC B1351.......................................................................7-64
DTC B1340.......................................................................7-57 1. (LBE) Circuit Shorted Test......................................7-64
1. (PK/GY) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-57 2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-65
2. Amplifier Terminal 20 Test.......................................7-58 3. [288] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-65
3. [2B] Terminal 12 Test..............................................7-58 4. [162] Terminal 3 Test...............................................7-65
4. [27A] Terminal L1 Voltage Test...............................7-58 5. (LBE/BK) Circuit Grounded Test.............................7-65
5. (PK/O) Circuit Voltage Test.....................................7-58 6. [288] Terminal 13 Test.............................................7-65
6. [2B] Terminal 12 Test..............................................7-58 7. [162] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-65
7. [27A] Terminal L2 Voltage Test...............................7-58 8. Reset Test...............................................................7-65
TABLE OF CONTENTS VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DTC B1352.......................................................................7-65 1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
1. (LBE) Circuit Voltage Test.......................................7-65 Test..............................................................................7-72
2. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-65 2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
3. [288] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-65 Test..............................................................................7-72
4. [162] Terminal 3 Test...............................................7-66 DTC B1432.......................................................................7-73
5. [27] Terminal K1 Voltage Test.................................7-66 1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
6. (LBE/BK) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-66 Test..............................................................................7-73
7. [288] Terminal 13 Test.............................................7-66 2. [149-1] Terminal 1 Voltage Test...............................7-73
8. [162] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-66 3. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
9. [27] Terminal K2 Voltage Test.................................7-66 Test..............................................................................7-73
10. Reset Test.............................................................7-66 4. [149-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test...............................7-73
DTC B1433.......................................................................7-73
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 1. [149-1] Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test.............7-73
Description and Operation................................................7-67 2. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test...............................7-73
Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-67 DTC B1440.......................................................................7-73
Connector Information................................................7-67 1. [149-1] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open
DTC B1403, B1404...........................................................7-67 Test..............................................................................7-73
1. Fuse Test................................................................7-67 2. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open
DTC B1410.......................................................................7-68 Test..............................................................................7-74
1. Channel 1 [149-1] Terminal 5 Test..........................7-68 3. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test.............................7-74
2. [149-1] Terminal 6 Test............................................7-68 DTC B1441.......................................................................7-74
3. [35-2] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-68 1. [149-1] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
4. [35-2] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-68 Test..............................................................................7-74
5. Speaker Test...........................................................7-68 2. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
DTC B1411.......................................................................7-68 Test..............................................................................7-74
1. Channel 1 [149-1] Terminal 5 Circuit Test...............7-68 DTC B1442.......................................................................7-74
2. [149-1] Terminal 6 Circuit Test................................7-68 1. [149-1] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
3. [35-1] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-68 Test..............................................................................7-74
4. [35-1] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-69 2. [149-1] Terminal 3 Voltage Test...............................7-74
DTC B1412.......................................................................7-69 3. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
1. Channel 1 Terminal 5 Voltage Test.........................7-69 Test..............................................................................7-74
2. Terminal 6 Voltage Test...........................................7-69 4. [149-1] Terminal 4 Voltage Test...............................7-75
3. [35-1] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-69 DTC B1443.......................................................................7-75
4. [35-1] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-69 1. [149-1] Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test....7-75
DTC B1413.......................................................................7-69 2. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test.............................7-75
1. Channel 1 [35-1] Test..............................................7-69 All Speakers Inoperative...................................................7-75
2. [35-2] Test...............................................................7-69 1. Radio Test...............................................................7-75
3. Speaker Test...........................................................7-69 2. Power Terminal 9 Test.............................................7-75
DTC B1420.......................................................................7-70 3. Power Terminal 16 Test...........................................7-76
1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Test..........................7-70 4. Ground Terminal 10 Test.........................................7-76
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Test............................................7-70 5. Ground Terminal 17 Test.........................................7-76
3. [34-2] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-70 6. Switch Power Terminal 19 Test...............................7-76
4. [34-2] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-70 7. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-76
5. Speaker Test...........................................................7-70 Left Fairing Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio.................7-76
DTC B1421.......................................................................7-70 1. Left Speaker Circuit Shorted Test...........................7-76
1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Test..........................7-70 2. [35B-1] Shorted Test...............................................7-77
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Test............................................7-70 3. Speaker Shorted Test.............................................7-77
3. [34-1] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-70 4. Left Speaker Circuit Open Test...............................7-77
4. [34-1] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-70 5. [35-1] Terminal 2 Open Test....................................7-77
DTC B1422.......................................................................7-71 6. [35-1] Terminal 1 Open Test....................................7-77
1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Voltage Test.............7-71 7. [35-2] Terminal 1 Open Test....................................7-77
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Voltage Test...............................7-71 8. [35-2] Terminal 2 Open Test....................................7-77
3. [34-1] Terminal 1 Test..............................................7-71 9. [149-1] Terminal 5 Grounded Test...........................7-77
4. [34-1] Terminal 2 Test..............................................7-71 10. [35B-1] Terminal 2 Grounded Test........................7-77
DTC B1423.......................................................................7-71 11. [149-1] Terminal 6 Grounded Test.........................7-77
1. Channel 1 [149-1] Test............................................7-71 12. [35B-1] Terminal 1 Grounded Test........................7-77
2. [34-2] Test...............................................................7-71 13. (BN/GY) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-77
3. Speaker Test...........................................................7-71 14. [35B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test............................7-78
DTC B1430.......................................................................7-72 15. [149B-1] Terminal 5 Voltage Test..........................7-78
1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Open Test.............7-72 16. (BN/O) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-78
2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open 17. [35B-1] Terminal 1 Voltage Test............................7-78
Test..............................................................................7-72 18. [149B-1] Terminal 6 Voltage Test..........................7-78
3. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test...............................7-72 19. Amplifier Test........................................................7-78
DTC B1431.......................................................................7-72 Left Fairing Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio.........7-78
TABLE OF CONTENTS VII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-78 7.24 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2
2. [35T] Shorted Test...................................................7-78
Description and Operation................................................7-86
3. Circuit Open Test....................................................7-79
Diagnostic Tips............................................................7-86
4. [35T] Terminal B Open Test....................................7-79
Connector Information................................................7-86
5. [35T] Terminal A Open Test....................................7-79
DTC B1403, B1404...........................................................7-86
6. [149-1] Terminal 2 Grounded Test...........................7-79
1. Fuse Test................................................................7-86
7. [35T] Terminal B Grounded Test.............................7-79
DTC B1410.......................................................................7-87
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 5 Test..........................7-87
9. [35T] Terminal A Grounded Test.............................7-79
2. [149-2] Terminal 6 Test............................................7-87
10. (PK/GY) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-79
3. Speaker Test...........................................................7-87
11. [149B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test..........................7-79
DTC B1411.......................................................................7-87
12. (PK/O) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-79
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 5 Circuit Test...............7-87
2. [149-2] Terminal 6 Circuit Test................................7-87
14. Amplifier Test........................................................7-79
3. [42W] Terminal A Test.............................................7-87
Both Left Speakers Low or No Audio...............................7-80
4. [42W] Terminal B Test.............................................7-87
DTC B1412.......................................................................7-87
2. [149B-1] Terminal 20 Open Test.............................7-80
1. Channel 1 Terminal 5 Voltage Test.........................7-87
3. [2] Terminal 12 Open Test.......................................7-80
2. Channel 1 Terminal 6 Voltage Test.........................7-88
DTC B1413.......................................................................7-88
1. Channel 1 [42WB] Test...........................................7-88
6. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-80
2. Speaker Test...........................................................7-88
Right Fairing Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio...............7-81
DTC B1420.......................................................................7-88
1. Right Speaker Circuit Shorted Test.........................7-81
2. [34B-1] Shorted Test...............................................7-81
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Test............................................7-89
3. Speaker Shorted Test.............................................7-81
3. [298] Terminal 1 Test...............................................7-89
4. Right Speaker Circuit Open Test.............................7-81
4. [298] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-89
5. [34-1] Terminal 1 Open Test....................................7-81
5. Speaker Test...........................................................7-89
DTC B1421.......................................................................7-89
2. [149-2] Terminal 8 Test............................................7-89
3. [298] Terminal 1 Test...............................................7-89
10. [34B-1] Terminal 1 Grounded Test........................7-82
4. [298] Terminal 4 Test...............................................7-89
11. [149-1] Terminal 8 Grounded Test.........................7-82
DTC B1422.......................................................................7-89
12. [34B-1] Terminal 2 Grounded Test........................7-82
1. [149-2] Terminal 7 Woofer Speaker Voltage Test.....7-90
13. (BN/R) Circuit Voltage Test...................................7-82
2. [298] Terminal 1 Voltage Test..................................7-90
14. [34B-1] Terminal 1 Voltage Test............................7-82
3. [149-2] Terminal 7 Voltage Test...............................7-90
4. [149-2] Terminal 8 Woofer Speaker Voltage Test.....7-90
16. (BN/GN) Circuit Voltage Test................................7-82
5. [298] Terminal 4 Voltage Test..................................7-90
17. [34B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test............................7-82
DTC B1423.......................................................................7-90
19. Amplifier Test........................................................7-83
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Test............................................7-90
Right Fairing Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio.......7-83
2. Speaker Test...........................................................7-90
DTC B1430.......................................................................7-91
2. [34T] Shorted Test...................................................7-83
1. [149-2] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Open Test.............7-91
2. [149-2] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open
4. [34T] Terminal B Open Test....................................7-83
Test..............................................................................7-91
3. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test...............................7-91
DTC B1431.......................................................................7-91
7. [34TB] Terminal B Grounded Test...........................7-83
1. [149-2] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
Test..............................................................................7-91
9. [34TB] Terminal A Grounded Test...........................7-83
2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded
10. (PK/BK) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-84
Test..............................................................................7-91
DTC B1432.......................................................................7-91
12. (PK) Circuit Voltage Test.......................................7-84
1. [149-2] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
Test..............................................................................7-92
14. Amplifier Test........................................................7-84
Both Right Speakers Low or No Audio.............................7-84
3. [149-2] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage
Test..............................................................................7-92
3. [2] Terminal 9 Open Test.........................................7-85
DTC B1433.......................................................................7-92
1. [149-2] Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test.............7-92
2. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test...............................7-92
6. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-85
DTC B1440.......................................................................7-93
TABLE OF CONTENTS VIII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open 2. [149B-2] Terminal 20 Open Test...........................7-100
Test..............................................................................7-93 3. [149B-2] Terminal 21 Open Test...........................7-100
2. [149-2] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open 4. Amplifier Test........................................................7-100
Test..............................................................................7-93 Right Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio......7-100
3. [298] Terminal 2 Open Test.....................................7-93 1. Right Speaker Circuit Shorted Test.......................7-101
4. [298] Terminal 5 Open Test.....................................7-93 2. [41W] Shorted Test...............................................7-101
5. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test.............................7-93 3. Right Speaker Circuit Open Test...........................7-101
DTC B1441.......................................................................7-93 4. [41W] Terminal A Open Test.................................7-101
1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded 5. [298] Terminal 1 Open Test...................................7-101
Test..............................................................................7-94 6. [41W] Terminal B Open Test.................................7-101
2. [149-2] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Grounded 7. [298] Terminal 4 Open Test...................................7-101
Test..............................................................................7-94 8. [149-2] Terminal 7 Grounded Test.........................7-101
3. [298] Terminal 2 Grounded Test..............................7-94 9. [41W] Terminal A Grounded Test..........................7-101
4. [298] Terminal 5 Grounded Test..............................7-94 10. [298] Terminal 1 Grounded Test..........................7-101
DTC B1442.......................................................................7-94 11. [149-2] Terminal 8 Grounded Test.......................7-101
1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage 12. [41W] Terminal B Grounded Test........................7-101
Test..............................................................................7-94 13. [298] Terminal 1 Grounded Test..........................7-102
2. [298] Terminal 2 Voltage Test..................................7-94 14. (LBE/R) Circuit Voltage Test...............................7-102
3. [149-2] Terminal 2 Voltage Test...............................7-94 15. [298] Terminal 1 Voltage Test..............................7-102
4. [149-2] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Voltage 16. [149B-2] Terminal 7 Voltage Test........................7-102
Test..............................................................................7-94 17. (LBE/GN) Circuit Voltage Test.............................7-102
5. [298] Terminal 5 Voltage Test..................................7-94 18. [298] Terminal 4 Voltage Test..............................7-102
6. [149-2] Terminal 4 Voltage Test...............................7-95 19. [149B-2] Terminal 8 Voltage Test........................7-102
DTC B1443.......................................................................7-95 20. Amplifier Test......................................................7-102
1. [149-2] Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test....7-95 Right Saddlebag Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio.7-102
2. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test.............................7-95 1. Circuit Shorted Test...............................................7-102
All Speakers Inoperative...................................................7-95 2. [41T] Shorted Test.................................................7-103
1. Radio Test...............................................................7-95 3. Circuit Open Test..................................................7-103
2. Power Terminal 9 Test.............................................7-95 4. [41T] Terminal B Open Test..................................7-103
3. Power Terminal 16 Test...........................................7-96 5. [298] Terminal 5 Open Test...................................7-103
4. Ground Terminal 10 Test.........................................7-96 6. [41T] Terminal A Open Test..................................7-103
5. Ground Terminal 17 Test.........................................7-96 7. [298] Terminal 2 Open Test...................................7-103
6. Switch Power Terminal 19 Test...............................7-96 8. [149-2] Terminal 4 Grounded Test.........................7-103
7. Amplifier Test..........................................................7-96 9. [41T] Terminal B Grounded Test...........................7-103
Left Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio...........7-96 10. [298] Terminal 5 Grounded Test..........................7-103
1. Left Speaker Circuit Shorted Test...........................7-96 11. [149-2] Terminal 3 Grounded Test.......................7-103
2. [42W] Shorted Test.................................................7-97 12. [41T] Terminal A Grounded Test.........................7-103
3. Left Speaker Circuit Open Test...............................7-97 13. [298] Terminal 2 Grounded Test..........................7-103
4. [42W] Terminal A Open Test...................................7-97 14. (LBE/GN) Circuit Voltage Test.............................7-104
5. [42W] Terminal B Open Test...................................7-97 15. (298) Terminal 5 Voltage Test.............................7-104
6. [149-2] Terminal 5 Grounded Test...........................7-97 16. [149B-2] Terminal 4 Voltage Test........................7-104
7. [42W] Terminal A Grounded Test............................7-97 17. (PK/BN) Circuit Voltage Test...............................7-104
8. (LBE/PK) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-97 18. (298) Terminal 2 Voltage Test.............................7-104
9. [149B-2] Terminal 5 Voltage Test............................7-97 19. [149B-2] Terminal 3 Voltage Test........................7-104
10. (LBE/Y) Circuit Voltage Test..................................7-97 20. Amplifier Test......................................................7-104
11. [149B-2] Terminal 6 Voltage Test..........................7-97 Both Right Speakers Low or No Audio...........................7-104
12. Amplifier Test........................................................7-97 1. Circuit Shorted Test...............................................7-104
Left Saddlebag Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio....7-98 2. [149B-2] Terminal 22 Open Test...........................7-105
1. Circuit Shorted Test.................................................7-98 3. [149B-2] Terminal 23 Open Test...........................7-105
2. [42T] Shorted Test...................................................7-98 4. Amplifier Test........................................................7-105
4. [42T] Terminal B Open Test....................................7-98 APPENDIX A WIRING
6. [149-2] Terminal 2 Grounded Test...........................7-98 A.1 CONNECTORS
7. [42T] Terminal B Grounded Test.............................7-98
CONNECTORS..................................................................A-1
Function and Location..................................................A-1
9. [42T] Terminal A Grounded Test.............................7-98
Place and Color............................................................A-1
10. (PK/BE) Circuit Voltage Test.................................7-98
Connector Number.......................................................A-1
Repair Instructions........................................................A-1
12. (PK/Y) Circuit Voltage Test....................................7-99
13. [149B-2] Terminal 1 Voltage Test..........................7-99 A.2 WIRING DIAGRAMS
14. Amplifier Test........................................................7-99
Wiring Diagram Information................................................A-3
Both Left Speakers Low or No Audio...............................7-99
Wire Color Codes.........................................................A-3
Wiring Diagram Symbols..............................................A-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS IX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS..........................................................A-4
A.3 CONNECTOR END VIEWS
Connector End Views.......................................................A-23
A.4 COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS
Component Locations......................................................A-30
A.5 TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR
Tyco HDSC Sealed Connector Repair.............................A-33
Separating Connector.................................................A-33
Mating Connector.......................................................A-33
Terminal Removal.......................................................A-33
Installing Terminal.......................................................A-34
Replacement and Repair............................................A-34
APPENDIX B REFERENCE
B.1 LENGTH CONVERSION
Conversion Table................................................................B-1
B.2 FLUID CONVERSION
United States System.........................................................B-2
Metric System.....................................................................B-2
British Imperial System.......................................................B-2
B.3 TORQUE CONVERSION
United States System.........................................................B-3
Metric System.....................................................................B-3
B.4 GLOSSARY
Acronyms and Abbreviations.............................................B-4
REFERENCE MATERIAL
TOOLS...........................................................I
Torque Values.............................................IX
Index............................................................XI
TABLE OF CONTENTS X
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
1.1 FASTENER TORQUE VALUES ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 AIR FILTER ELEMENT ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 LUBRICANTS ....................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 REAR SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................ 1-7
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES 1.1
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES IN THIS
CHAPTER
The table below lists torque values for all fasteners presented
in this chapter.
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE NOTES

Air cleaner insert screw 27–32 in-lbs 3.1–3.6 N·m 1.3 Air Filter Element, Install
Air filter element screws 120–144 in-lbs 13.6–16.3 N·m 1.3 Air Filter Element, Install
94000390 1-1
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1.2
GENERAL NOTE
This motorcycle uses SCREAMIN' EAGLE SYN3 FULL
The scheduled maintenance table in this section lists the SYNTHETIC MOTORCYCLE LUBRICANT 20W50 in the
maintenance requirements for this CVO model. Refer to Table engine, transmission and primary chaincase.
1-1. In addition to this supplement, see the service manual for
service procedures.
Disposal and Recycling
Various lubricants, sealants and greases are recommended
When servicing the motorcycle, properly recycle or dispose of
in certain service operations. Refer to Table 1-2 for the
all fluids, bulbs, batteries, filters and other scrap materials
appropriate part numbers for these items.
according to local regulations.
Table 1-1. Regular Service Intervals: 2017 FLHXSE
ITEM SERVICED 1000 mi 5000 mi 10000 mi 15000 mi 20000 mi 25000 mi 30000 mi 35000 mi 40000 mi 45000 mi 50000 mi NOTES
1600 km 8000 km 16000 km 24000 km 32000 km 40000 km 48000 km 56000 km 64000 km 72000 km 80000 km
Check operation of electrical X X X X X X X X X X X
equipment and switches
Check front tire pressure, in- X X X X X X X X X X X 6
spect tread
Inspect front brake fluid at sight X X X X X X X X X X X 4
glass
Inspect clutch fluid system for X X X X X X X X X X X 7
leaks, contact or abrasion
Check front brake and hydraul- X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
ic clutch reservoir cover screw
torque
Check hand control fastener X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
switch housing screw torque
Check clutch lever bracket X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
handlebar clamp screw torque
Check master cylinder handle- X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
bar clamp screw torque
Inspect, lubricate and adjust X X 1, 2
steering head bearings
Inspect air cleaner, service as X X X X X X X X X X 3
required
Replace engine oil and filter X X X X X X X X X X X 3, 6
Check engine coolant freeze X X X X X X X X X X X
point, inspect for leaks
Coolant Replace coolant every 30000 mi (48,000 km) 1
Clean radiators X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace primary chaincase X X X X X X 3
lubricant
Replace transmission lubricant X X X 3
Inspect oil lines and brake X X X X X X X X X X X 1, 6
system for leaks, contact or
abrasion
Inspect fuel lines and fittings X X X X X X X X X X X 1, 6
for leaks, contact or abrasion
Inspect rear brake fluid at sight X X X X X X X X X X X
glass
Check rear brake reservoir X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
cover screw torque
Inspect brake pads and discs X X X X X X X X X X X
for wear
Check front axle nut torque X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
Inspect and lubricate jiffy stand X X X X X X X X X X X 1, 3
Check, adjust and lubricate X X X X X X X X X X X
(with HARLEY LUBE) brake
and clutch controls
Check rear tire pressure, in- X X X X X X X X X X X 6
spect tread
Inspect and adjust drive belt X X X X X X X X X X X 1
and sprockets
1-2 94000390
Table 1-1. Regular Service Intervals: 2017 FLHXSE
ITEM SERVICED 1000 mi 5000 mi 10000 mi 15000 mi 20000 mi 25000 mi 30000 mi 35000 mi 40000 mi 45000 mi 50000 mi NOTES
1600 km 8000 km 16000 km 24000 km 32000 km 40000 km 48000 km 56000 km 64000 km 72000 km 80000 km
Check rear axle nut torque X X X X X X 1, 4, 6
Inspect exhaust system for X X X X X X X X X X X 3
leaks, cracks and loose, or
missing fasteners or exhaust
shields
Battery Check battery, terminal torque and clean connections annually. Lubricate terminals with ELECTRICAL CONTACT LUB- 6
RICANT
Spark plugs Replace spark plugs every two years or every 30000 mi (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Rebuild front forks X 1, 5
Fuel Filter Replace fuel filter every 100000 mi (160,000 km). 1, 3
Rear sprocket isolators Inspect rear sprocket isolators for wear at each rear tire change.
Brake and clutch systems Flush brake and clutch systems and replace DOT 4 hydraulic brake and clutch fluids every two years 1
Road test to verify component X X X X X X X X X X X
and system functions
NOTES: 1. Should be performed by an authorized Harley-Davidson dealer, unless you have the proper tools, service data and are mechan-
ically qualified.
2. Disassemble, lubricate and inspect every 25000 mi (40,000 km).
3. Perform maintenance more frequently in severe riding conditions (such as extreme temperatures, dusty environments, mountainous
or rough roads, long storage conditions, short runs, heavy stop/go traffic or poor fuel quality).
4. For torque instructions, see Shop Practices in the service manual.
5. Disassemble, inspect, rebuild forks and replace fork oil every 50000 mi (80,000 km).
6. Perform annually or at specified intervals, whichever comes first.
7. Clutch fluid level will rise as clutch wears.
NOTE • Always check for and complete open recalls and product
Whenever a vehicle is in for maintenance: programs.
• Always verify that the latest calibration is installed.
Table 1-2. Lubricants, Greases, Sealants
ITEM PART NUMBER PACKAGE
3M 847 Adhesive 021200-19718 * 5 oz tube
3M General Purpose Adhesive Remover 15 oz aerosol
Anti-Seize Lubricant 98960-97 1 oz squeeze tube
CCI #20 Brake Grease 42830-05 squeeze packet
DOT 4 Brake Fluid 99953-99A 12 oz bottle
Dow Corning Moly 44 Grease 94674-99 2 cc packet
Electrical Contact Lubricant 11300004 1 oz squeeze tube
Formula+ Transmission and Primary Chaincase 99851-05 1 qt bottle
Lubricant
G40M Brake Grease 42820-04 squeeze packet
Genuine Harley-Davidson Extended Life Antifreeze 99822-02 1 gal container
and Coolant
Genuine Harley-Davidson H-D 360 20W50 99816-2050/00QT 1 qt bottle
Motorcycle Oil
Harley-Davidson Adhesive (Griplock) 99839-95 10 g tube
Harley-Davidson High Performance Sealant - Gray 99650-02 1.9 oz squeeze tube
Harley-Davidson Leather Dressing 98261-91V 6 oz can
Harley-Davidson Seal Grease 11300005 1 oz tube
Harley Lube 94968-09 1/4 oz needle dispenser
Hylomar Gasket and Thread Sealant 99653-85 3.0 oz tube
Loctite 222 Low Strength Threadlocker and Sealant (purple) 99811-97 6 mL tube
Loctite 243 Medium Strength Threadlocker and Sealant (blue) 99642-97 6 mL tube
11100005 50 mL bottle
Loctite 246 Medium Strength/High Temperature Threadlocker
(blue)
94000390 1-3
Table 1-2. Lubricants, Greases, Sealants
ITEM PART NUMBER PACKAGE
Loctite 262 High Strength Threadlocker and Sealant (red) 94759-99 6 mL tube
Loctite 271 High Strength Threadlocker and Sealant (red) 6 mL tube
11100006 50 mL bottle
Loctite 411 Prism Instant Adhesive
Loctite 420 Super Bonder Adhesive
Loctite 565 Thread Sealant 99818-97 6 mL tube
Loctite 770 Prism Primer
Loctite 7649 Cleaner/Primer 98968-99 1.75 oz bottle
Screamin' Eagle Assembly Lube 11300002 4 oz tube
Screamin' Eagle SYN3 Full Synthetic Motorcycle 99824-03/00QT 1 qt bottle
Lubricant 20W50
Special Purpose Grease 99857-97A 14 oz cartridge
Type "E" Hydraulic Fork Oil 62600026 16 oz bottle
Wheel Bearing Grease 99855-89 1 lb can
99856-92 14 oz cartridge
* Not a Harley-Davidson part number
1-4 94000390
AIR FILTER ELEMENT 1.3
GENERAL
For Asia-Pacific air filter assembly, see the service manual.
REMOVE
NOTE
For air filter element cleaning information, see service manual.
1. See Figure 1-1. Remove screws (1) and air cleaner insert
(2).
2. Remove screws (3).
3. Remove air cleaner cover (4) and air filter element (5).
sm08668
4 5
3
2
1
1. Screw (2)
2. Insert
3. Screw (2)
4. Cover
5. Air filter element
Figure 1-1. Air Filter Element
INSTALL
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE

Air cleaner insert screw 27–32 in-lbs 3.1–3.6 N·m
Air filter element screws 120–144 in-lbs 13.6–16.3 N·m
1. See Figure 1-1. Install air filter element (5).
a. Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH

THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (blue) to screws
(3).
b. Secure air filter element (5) and cover (4) with screws
(3).
c. Tighten to 120–144 in-lbs (13.6–16.3 N·m).
2. Install insert (2).
a. Secure insert with screws (1).
b. Tighten to 27–32 in-lbs (3.1–3.6 N·m).
94000390 1-5
LUBRICANTS 1.4
CHANGE AND CHECK LUBRICANTS SCREAMIN' EAGLE SYN3 FULL SYNTHETIC MOTORCYCLE
LUBRICANT 20W50 is recommended for engine, transmission
and primary chaincase lubrication.
CAUTION
If SYN3 is not available, use GENUINE HARLEY-DAVIDSON
Prolonged or repeated contact with used motor oil may
H-D 360 20W50 MOTORCYCLE OIL. Although H-D 360 is
be harmful to skin and could cause skin cancer. Promptly
compatible with SYN3, we suggest the mixture of fluids be
wash affected areas with soap and water. (00358b)
changed as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If H-D 360 is not available, the third choice is an oil certified
If engine oil is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Contact for diesel engines. DO NOT add diesel engine oil to the
a physician immediately. In case of contact with eyes, primary chaincase or transmission. Acceptable diesel engine
immediately flush with water. Contact a physician if oil designations include: CH-4, CI-4 and CJ-4. The preferred
irritation persists. (00357d) viscosities for diesel engine oils, in descending order are:
20W50, 15W40 and 10W40.
NOTICE
We again suggest the mixture of the fluids be changed as soon
Do not switch lubricant brands indiscriminately because as possible. At the first opportunity, see a Harley-Davidson
some lubricants interact chemically when mixed. Use of dealer to change back to 100 percent Harley-Davidson oil.
inferior lubricants can damage the engine. (00184a)
To switch lubricant to H-D 360, completely drain the SYN3
The procedures to change lubricants and check levels is the before filling with H-D 360. It is not required to flush out any
same as OE vehicles except the recommended lubricants. See residual lubricant. Refer to Table 1-3.
the service manual.
Table 1-3. Recommended Engine Oils
TYPE VISCOSITY RATING LOWEST AMBIENT COLD-WEATHER
TEMPERATURE STARTS BELOW
50 °F (10 °C)
Screamin' Eagle SYN3 Full Synthetic SAE 20W50 HD 360 Above 30 °F (-1 °C) Excellent
Motorcycle Lubricant
Genuine Harley-Davidson H-D 360 Mo- SAE 20W50 HD 360 Above 40 °F (4 °C) Good
torcycle Oil
Genuine Harley-Davidson H-D 360 Mo- SAE 50 HD 360 Above 60 °F (16 °C) Poor
torcycle Oil
Genuine Harley-Davidson H-D 360 Mo- SAE 60 HD 360 Above 80 °F (27 °C) Poor
torcycle Oil
1-6 94000390
REAR SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENTS 1.5
MANUAL SUSPENSION PRELOAD 5. Install the left saddlebag.
om01417
Adjust the shock absorber preload for the weight the motorcycle
is to carry.
• Increase preload to accommodate the total load on the

motorcycle.
• Reduce the preload if carrying less weight.
1. Remove the left saddlebag.
2. See Figure 1-2. Rotate the preload adjustment knob
counterclockwise until it stops. This is the minimum preload
position.
NOTE
Each line on the adjustment decal represents approximately
5 full turns.
3. Refer to Table 1-4. Rotate the knob clockwise the

recommended number of turns for the total weight of the
rider plus the passenger and cargo. The knob will click
after each half turn.
4. Turn the knob half turns to fine tune the ride if desired. Figure 1-2. Preload Adjustment Knob
Table 1-4. Suspension Preload Table: Low Length Shocks, with or without Tour-Pak
ADDITIONAL WEIGHT OF PASSENGER, CARGO AND ACCESSORIES
LB 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
KG 0 5 9 14 18 23 27 32 36 41 45 50 54 59 64 68 73 77 82
RIDER WEIGHT
LB KG Full Turns of Knob
150 68 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18
160 73 0 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19
170 77 0 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20
180 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 21
190 86 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21
200 91 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22
210 95 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23
220 100 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 -
230 104 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 -
240 109 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 -
250 113 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 -
260 118 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 -
270 122 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 -
94000390 1-7
NOTES
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS: CHASSIS ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ....................................................................... 2-4
2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS ....................................................................................... 2-6
2.5 WHEELS ............................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.6 FRONT AXLE COVERS ..................................................................................................... 2-11
2.7 HANDLEBAR ...................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.8 HAND GRIPS ...................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.9 SEAT ................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.10 REAR FASCIA .................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET ASSEMBLY .............................................................. 2-17
2.12 REAR FENDER ................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.13 SADDLEBAGS .................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.14 MUFFLER END CAP ........................................................................................................ 2-21
CHASSIS
NOTES
CHAPTER
in this chapter.

Axle cover set screw 60–84 in-lbs 6.8–9.5 N·m 2.6 FRONT AXLE COVERS, Replacement
LOCTITE 262 HIGH STRENGTH THREADLOCK-
ER AND SEALANT (red)
Brake disc screws, front 16–24 ft-lbs 21.7–32.5 N·m 2.5 WHEELS, Front Wheel Service
Always use new screws
Brake pedal cover screws 12–15 ft-lbs 16.2–20.3 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Rear Brake
Pedal Pad
Footboard bracket screws, rider 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–57 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Rider
Footboards
Footboard pivot bolt nut, rider 60–80 in-lbs 6.8–9 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Rider
Footboards
Footboard wear peg 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Rider
Footboards
Footrest cover screw, passenger 15–20 ft-lbs 20.3–27.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Passenger
Footrests
Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH
THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (blue)
Footrest support lower screw, passenger 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Passenger
Footrests
Footrest support upper screw, passenger 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–56.9 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Passenger
Footrests
Handlebar switch housing screws 35–45 in-lbs 4.9–5.1 N·m 2.8 Hand grips, Left Hand Grip
Latch handle screw 45–55 in-lbs 5.1–6.2 N·m 2.13 SADDLEBAGS, Latch Handle Removal and
Installation
License plate lamp connector cover nut 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5.1 N·m 2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET AS-
SEMBLY, Installation
License plate lamp cover screw 57–69 in-lbs 6.4–7.8 N·m 2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET AS-
SEMBLY, Installation
Muffler end cap fasteners 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 2.14 MUFFLER END CAP, Replacement
Muffler shield clamps 20–40 in-lbs 2.3–4.5 N·m 2.14 MUFFLER END CAP, Replacement
Pillion seat bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m 2.9 SEAT, Seat and Pillion
Rear fascia flange nuts 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5 N·m 2.10 REAR FASCIA, Installation
Shift lever clamp screws 18–22 ft-lbs 24.4–29.8 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Shift Levers
Shift lever peg fastener 14–16 ft-lbs 19–21.7 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS, Shift Levers
Valve stem, 90 degree with sensor 54–62 in-lbs 6–7 N·m 2.5 WHEELS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
94000390 2-1
SPECIFICATIONS: CHASSIS 2.2
GENERAL Table 2-2. Weights
ITEM FLHXSE
Table 2-1. Dimensions lb kg
ITEM in mm GVWR 1360 617
Overall length 96.7 2455 GAWR front 500 227
Overall width 38.2 970 GAWR rear 927 420
Overall height 53.0 1345 * The total weight of the motorcycle as delivered with all
Wheelbase 64.0 1625 oil/fluids and approximately 90% of fuel.
** The total weight of accessories, cargo, riding gear, passen-
Road clearance 4.9 125
ger and rider must not exceed this weight.
Seat height* 26.3 668
* With 180 lb (81.7 kg) rider on seat. Table 2-3. Capacities
ITEM U.S. METRIC
WARNING
Fuel tank (total) 6.0 gal 22.7 L
Do not exceed the motorcycle's Gross Vehicle Weight Low fuel warning light on 1.0 gal 3.8 L
Rating (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (approximate)
Exceeding these weight ratings can lead to component
failure and adversely affect stability, handling and Engine oil capacity with filter *
performance, which could result in death or serious injury. Twin-Cooled (new system) 5.0 qt 4.7 L
(00016f)
Service oil change 4.75 qt 4.5 L
• GVWR is the sum of the weight of the motorcycle, Transmission ** 32 oz 0.95 L
accessories, and the maximum weight of the rider, (approximate)
passenger and cargo that can be safely carried. Primary chaincase 34 oz 1.0 L
• GAWR is the maximum amount of weight that can be safely (dry fill; approximate) ***
carried on each axle. Coolant, Twin-Cooled models 0.8 qt 0.8 L
• See information label on frame downtube for GVWR and (approximate)
GAWR. * When refilling, initially add 4.5 qt (4.3 L). Add more as
needed to bring level within specification.
The maximum additional weight allowed on the motorcycle
** When refilling, initially add 28 fl oz (0.83 L)Add more as
equals the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) minus the
needed to bring level within specification.
running weight. For example, a motorcycle with GVWR of
*** Amount is approximate. Fill to bottom of pressure plate
1,200 lb (544 kg) having a running weight of 800 lb (363 kg),
OD with vehicle upright.
would allow a maximum of an additional 400 lb (181 kg)
combined weight of the rider, passenger, riding gear, cargo
and installed accessories. WARNING
Use only Harley-Davidson specified tires. See a
Table 2-2. Weights Harley-Davidson dealer. Using non-specified tires can
ITEM FLHXSE adversely affect stability, handling or braking, which could
result in death or serious injury. (00024b)
lb kg
Running weight * 871 395 NOTE
Harley-Davidson does not perform any testing with 100 percent
Maximum additional weight 489 222 nitrogen in tires. Harley-Davidson neither recommends nor
allowed ** discourages the use of pure nitrogen to inflate tires.
2-2 94000390
Table 2-4. Specified Tires
MOUNT SIZE SPECIFIED TIRE PRESSURE (COLD 68 °F (20 °C))
psi kPa
Front 19 in Dunlop D408F 130/60B19 M/C 61H 36 248
Rear 18 in Dunlop D407 180/55B18 M/C 80H 40 276
• Tire pressure will vary with changes in ambient and tire temperature. Check pressure with tires cold (68 °F (20 °C)). Increase
tire pressure by 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 10 °F (5 °C) in ambient air temperature above this point.
• Do not use the TPMS as a pressure gauge when adding or removing air from a tire. Sensor data is sent to the TPMS at
varying intervals and may not refresh immediately when adding or removing air from the tire. Over-inflation or under-inflation
can result.
• The TPMS sensor will not communicate pressures above 50–60 psi (345–414 kPa) depending on altitude.
• TPMS has been calibrated to use air in the tire. Use of 100 percent nitrogen may affect the accuracy of the system.
• Do not rotate valve stems from their properly installed position. This can affect the valve stem seal and result in a slow leak.
• Do not use liquid tire balancers or sealing agents in wheels with a TPMS sensor. Damage to the sensor can result.
94000390 2-3
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) 2.3
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
om01391
General
See Figure 2-2. A unique 17-digit serial or Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) is assigned to each motorcycle. For a description
of each item in the VIN, refer to Table 2-5.
Location
See Figure 2-1. The full 17-digit VIN (1) is stamped on the right 2
side of the frame near the steering head. In some destinations,
a printed VIN label (2) is also attached to the front downtube.
1
Abbreviated VIN
An abbreviated VIN showing the vehicle model, engine type,
model year, and sequential number is stamped on the left side
of the crankcase between the engine cylinders.
NOTE
Always give the full 17-digit vehicle identification number when
ordering parts or making any inquiry about the motorcycle.
1. Stamped VIN
2. VIN label
Figure 2-1. VIN Locations
om02038c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1HD 1 PX F 1 7 H B 111000
Figure 2-2. Typical Harley-Davidson VIN: 2017 FLHXSE
Table 2-5. Harley-Davidson VIN Breakdown: 2017 FLHXSE
POSITION DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE VALUES
1 World manufacturer identifier 1HD=Originally manufactured in the United States
5HD=Originally manufactured in the United States for sale outside of the
United States
932=Originally manufactured in Brazil
MEG=Originally manufactured in India
2 Motorcycle type 1=Heavyweight motorcycle (901 cm3 or larger)
3 Model PX=FLHXSE CVO Street Glide®
4 Engine type F=Twin-Cooled™ Milwaukee-Eight™ 114 Engine, 1868 cm3
5 Calibration/configuration, introduc- Normal Introduction Mid-year or Special Introduction
tion 1=Domestic (DOM) 2, 4=Domestic (DOM)
3=California (CAL) 5, 6=California (CAL)
A=Canada (CAN) B=Canada (CAN)
C=HDI D=HDI
E=Japan (JPN) F=Japan (JPN)
G=Australia (AUS) H=Australia (AUS)
J=Brazil (BRZ) K=Brazil (BRZ)
L=Asia Pacific (APC) M=Asia Pacific (APC)
N=India (IND) P=India (IND)
6 VIN check digit Can be 0-9 or X
7 Model year H=2017
2-4 94000390
Table 2-5. Harley-Davidson VIN Breakdown: 2017 FLHXSE
POSITION DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE VALUES
8 Assembly plant B=York, PA USA
D=H-D Brazil-Manaus, Brazil (CKD)
N=Haryana India (Bawal District Rewari)
9 Sequential number Varies
94000390 2-5
FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS 2.4
RIDER FOOTBOARDS 1. See Figure 2-3. If removing left rear bracket (13), raise
motorcycle using a suitable lift to remove weight from jiffy
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE stand.
Footboard bracket screws, 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–57 N·m 2. Remove screw (5).
rider
Footboard pivot bolt nut, rider 60–80 in-lbs 6.8–9 N·m 3. Remove locknut (6), lockwasher (8) and screw (9).
Footboard wear peg 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 4. Remove footboard and bracket assembly.
Removal Installation
NOTICE 1. See Figure 2-3. Install footboard and bracket assembly.
When lifting a motorcycle using a jack, be sure jack

2. Install screw (5).
contacts both lower frame tubes where down tubes and
lower frame tubes converge. Never lift by jacking on
cross-members, oil pan, mounting brackets, components 3. Install screw (9), lockwasher (8) and locknut (6).
or housings. Failure to comply can cause serious damage
resulting in the need to perform major repair work. (00586d) 4. Tighten fasteners to 36–42 ft-lbs (48.8–57 N·m).
NOTE
Left side footboard fasteners also secure the jiffy stand bracket.
sm06118c
1
2 3
4
5
5
2
6 3
13
7
12
8
11 9 9
10
8
14
6
1. Rubber pad 8. Lockwasher (2)
2. Pivot screw locknut (2) 9. Screw (2)
3. Pivot screw (2) 10. Footboard
4. Right rear bracket 11. Wear peg
5. Screw (2) 12. Jiffy stand bracket
6. Locknut (2) 13. Left rear bracket
7. Right forward bracket 14. Left forward bracket
Figure 2-3. Rider Footboards (Typical) (Quantities shown are for each footboard)
2. See Figure 2-3. Remove locknuts (2) and pivot screws (3)
Disassembly from bottom of footboard.
NOTE 3. Remove footboard from brackets.
If only replacing the rubber pad, refer to step 1, then perform 4. If necessary, remove wear peg (11).
steps 4-5 under ASSEMBLY.
Assembly
1. Tilt footboard up. From bottom of footboard, push rubber
pad anchors up through holes in footboard. 1. See Figure 2-3. If removed, install wear peg (11). Tighten
to 48–72 in-lbs (5.4–8.1 N·m).
2-6 94000390
2. Align footboard between brackets. Install pivot screws (3)
sm03963c
with locknuts (2) positioned on inboard side. 6
3. Install locknuts (2) onto pivot screws. Tighten to

60–80 in-lbs (6.8–9 N·m). 5
4
4. Moisten rubber anchors on bottom of new pad (1) with 7
soapy water.
3 8
5. Align pad on footboard. From bottom of footboard, pull
rubber anchors through holes in footboard. 2
1 9
SHIFT LEVERS

1. Splined shaft
Shift lever clamp screws 18–22 ft-lbs 24.4–29.8 N·m 2. Spacer
Shift lever peg fastener 14–16 ft-lbs 19–21.7 N·m 3. Heel shift lever
4. Sleeve
Replace Pegs 5. Shifter peg assembly
6. Fastener
NOTE
7. Lockwasher
Insert lockwasher between sleeve and shift lever. 8. Clamp screw (2)
9. Toe shift lever
1. See Figure 2-4. Remove fastener (6). Remove shift lever Figure 2-4. Shift Levers and Pegs
peg assembly (5) and sleeve (4) along with lockwasher
(7). REAR BRAKE PEDAL PAD
2. Insert sleeve (4), lockwasher (7) and fasten to shifter peg FASTENER TORQUE VALUE
assembly (5) with fastener (6). Brake pedal cover screws 12–15 ft-lbs 16.2–20.3 N·m
3. Rotate pegs for rider posture. Tighten to 14–16 ft-lbs NOTE

(19–21.7 N·m). See the service manual for foot brake lever or linkage.
Replace Heel-Toe Shift Levers 1. See Figure 2-5. Remove fastener (5) and offset washer
(4). Remove brake pedal rubber pad (3) with cover (2).
1. Mark location of levers relative to splined shaft using a
permanent marker. 2. Assemble chrome cover (2) and rubber pad (3).
2. See Figure 2-4. Remove clamp screws (8) from both levers 3. Secure assembly to foot brake lever (1) with offset washer
(3, 9). (4) and fastener (5). Tighten to 12–15 ft-lbs
(16.2–20.3 N·m).
NOTE
Install longer shift lever to the rear.
3. Pull shift levers and spacer (2) off splined shaft (1).
4. Align marks made during disassembly and position shift

levers on splined shaft, or adjust for rider comfort.
5. Tighten clamp screws to 18–22 ft-lbs (24.4–29.8 N·m).
94000390 2-7
2. Remove fasteners (6, 11), lockwasher (7) and footrest
sm06120e
support from frame.
Install Support and Footrest

2 1. See Figure 2-6. Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH
THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (blue) to fasteners (6,
11).
3 2. Install footrest support with screws (6, 11) and lockwasher

(7). Tighten screw (11) to 48–72 in-lbs (5.4–8.1 N·m).
Tighten screw (6) to 36–42 ft-lbs (48.8–56.9 N·m).
3. Install pivot, spring washer, locknut and passenger footrest

1 to footrest support. Secure with circlip.
sm06483b
4 7
6
8
5 4 5
3 9
1. Foot brake lever
2. Chrome cover
3. Rubber pad 2
4. Offset washer
5. Fastener 10
Figure 2-5. Rear Brake Pedal 11
PASSENGER FOOTRESTS
12
1
Footrest cover screw, 15–20 ft-lbs 20.3–27.1 N·m
1. Chrome cover
passenger
2. Screw
Footrest support lower screw, 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 3. Footpeg top
passenger 4. Footrest mount
Footrest support upper screw, 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–56.9 N·m 5. Circlip
passenger 6. Screw
7. Lockwasher
Remove Rubber and Chrome Cover 8. Footrest support
9. Pivot pin
1. See Figure 2-6. Remove screw (2). Remove pad
10. Spring washer
components (1, 3, 12).
11. Shoulder screw
2. Disassemble the pad. 12. Rubber pad
Figure 2-6. Passenger Footrest
Install and Adjust
1. Assemble items (1, 3, 12).
2. See Figure 2-6. Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH

THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (blue) to screw (2).
3. Install pad assembly with screw (2) Position for passenger

comfort.
4. Tighten to 15–20 ft-lbs (20.3–27.1 N·m).
Remove Footrest and Support

1. See Figure 2-6. Remove circlip (5), pivot pin (9) and spring
washer (10). Remove footrest mount (4) with pad
assembly.
2-8 94000390
WHEELS 2.5
FRONT WHEEL SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
Brake disc screws, front 16–24 ft-lbs 21.7–32.5 N·m PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II
NOTE HD-51794 TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL
Front wheel service procedures are similar to other models
with the following exceptions. FASTENER TORQUE VALUE
Valve stem, 90 degree with 54–62 in-lbs 6–7 N·m
See Figure 2-7. The front wheel and brake discs on this sensor
motorcycle are directional. When installing a tire, verify that
the direction of rotation matches the wheel rotation (1). General
Disc Replacement Sensors mounted in each tire measure and report tire pressure
data to the BCM. The BCM monitors the data and displays
1. Remove wheel. See the service manual. each tire pressure both in the Boom! Audio system information
screen as well as in the odometer trip display. See TPMS
NOTE DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51) for more information and
• The front wheel and brake discs on this motorcycle are diagnostics.
directional.
NOTE
• See Figure 2-7. When installing brake discs, verify the arrow • Do not use the TPMS as a pressure gauge when adding or
(2) on the disc points in the direction of wheel rotation. removing air from a tire. Sensor transmissions vary with
conditions and may not react immediately when adding or
2. Remove screws securing brake disc to the wheel. Repeat removing air from the tire. Over-inflation or under-inflation
procedure to remove disc on opposite side of wheel. can result.
Discard screws. • The TPMS sensor will not communicate pressures above
50–60 psi (345–414 kPa) depending on altitude.
3. Install new brake disc with new screws. Tighten in a
• TPMS has been calibrated to use air in the tire. Use of 100%
cross-wise pattern to 16–24 ft-lbs (21.7–32.5 N·m).
nitrogen may affect the accuracy of the system.
Wheel Installation
Remove Sensor
NOTE
1. Dismount tire. See Tire Replacement in this section.
The front wheel is directional. The wheel is embossed with
DOT and H-D logo near the hub. Install the wheel with these 2. See Figure 2-8. Remove nut (5).
markings on the left side.
3. Remove sensor (4) and spring (3) from valve stem.
1. Install wheel as outlined in service manual with embossed 4. Remove valve stem (1) from wheel. Discard valve stem.
markings on the left side.
Install Sensor
2. Install axle covers. See FRONT AXLE COVERS
(Page 2-11). NOTE
• Tire pressure sensors are designed for use with the wheels
sm06786a specified for the motorcycle. Attempting to use sensors on
1 other wheels can result in lack of proper fitment, TPMS
malfunction and air leakage.
• Sensors with good batteries can be reused.
• Never install a used valve stem or valve stem nut.
• See Figure 2-8. New valve stem (1) has pre-applied
2 threadlocker and includes new seal (2).
1. Install new valve stem/seal assembly in wheel.
a. Install sensor and spring with nut (5). Position valve

stem to face right side when wheel is installed.
1. Wheel rotation b. Align sensor so that it does not touch the wheel.
2. Arrow on disc
c. Do not allow sensor to contact the wheel while
Figure 2-7. Front Wheel Rotation tightening. While holding valve stem aligned with
wheel, tighten to 54–62 in-lbs (6–7 N·m).
94000390 2-9
d. Do not attempt to rotate valve stem once it is installed 5. Install tire on wheel. Start the first bead opposite from the
on wheel. valve stem.
6. Install first bead.
NOTE
The sensor must be in PARK mode (have been at rest for 7. Engage the second bead 30 degrees from the valve stem
approximately 7 minutes) to assign to the vehicle. This includes in the direction of machine rotation.
spin balancing or riding the motorcycle. 8. While rotating away from the valve stem, install the second
bead.
2. Install the tire. See Tire Replacement in this section. 9. Inflate to the correct pressure. Refer to Table 2-4.
3. New sensor: Before riding motorcycle, assign using TPMS sm08492

ACTIVATION TOOL (PART NUMBER: HD-51794) with
1 2
DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650).
3
a. Connect Digital Technician II to vehicle.
b. Go to Toolbox > Vehicle Setup > TPMS > Configure. 4

Select sensor assignment.
c. Follow the online instructions to configure system to

recognize sensors.
sm08491
1
1. Tire machine spoon
2 2. Valve stem
3. Tire machine rotation
4. 30 degrees
6 3
Figure 2-9. Tire Machine Operation
1. Valve stem
2. Seal
3. Spring
4. Sensor
5. Nut
6. Cap
Figure 2-8. Sensor and Valve Stem
Tire Replacement
NOTE
• Wheels equipped with tire pressure sensors require special
tire mounting and dismounting procedures. Failure to follow
these procedures results in damaged sensors.
• Never allow tire machine spoon, tire iron or tire bead to
contact sensor. Sensor damage will occur.
1. Break the bead being careful to not damage tire pressure

sensor.
2. See Figure 2-9. Engage tire machine spoon (1) 30 degrees
(4) from the valve stem (2) in the direction of tire machine
rotation (3).
3. While rotating wheel away from the valve stem, remove
the first bead.
4. Repeat with remaining bead. Remove tire.
2-10 94000390
FRONT AXLE COVERS 2.6
REPLACEMENT

Axle cover set screw 60–84 in-lbs 6.8–9.5 N·m
1. See Figure 2-10. Loosen set screw. Remove cover.
2. Remove set screw from cover.
NOTE
Install cover over axle end with set screw on the bottom.
Tighten set screw against a flat on the axle nut.
3. Liberally apply LOCTITE 262 HIGH STRENGTH

THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (red) to set screw
threads.
4. Install cover with set screw. Tighten to 60–84 in-lbs

(6.8–9.5 N·m).
5. Repeat steps for the opposite side.
sm08059
Figure 2-10. Front Axle Cover Set Screw
94000390 2-11
HANDLEBAR 2.7
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Handlebar servicing is essentially the same as the Touring

models except removal and installation of the dash panel. See
DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES (Page 7-7) for servicing the
dash panel.
2-12 94000390
HAND GRIPS 2.8
LEFT HAND GRIP sm08127

Handlebar switch housing 35–45 in-lbs 4.9–5.1 N·m
screws
Removal
Access the heated grip connectors. See DASH PANEL AND
SWITCHES (Page 7-7). Remove grip using the appropriate
procedure. See the service manual.
Installation
Install grip using the appropriate procedure. See the service
manual with the following exceptions:
NOTE
See Figure 2-13. To prevent damage to wire leads, do not
rotate grip sleeve, switch assembly and housings beyond the
range of the alignment dimples.
Figure 2-12. Glueless Grip Sleeve Locking Tooth
1. See Figure 2-11. Fit the grip rubber step to the notch in NOTE
the switch assembly. Verify that gap between the switch housings is on the bottom.
2. Loosely install the switch assembly housings.
3. See Figure 2-12. Rotate the grip in the housing to engage 4. See Figure 2-13. Hold the grip, switch assembly and
the switch housing locking tooth to the rubber sleeve. housings locked together. Rotate the assembly to center
the switch housing split-line between the alignment dimples
in the handlebar.
sm08142b
5. Tighten the switch housing screws in the following order

to 35–45 in-lbs (4.9–5.1 N·m):
a. Upper switch housing screw
b. Lower switch housing screw
6. See the service manual to complete installation.
7. Complete assembly. See DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES

(Page 7-7).
sm08129
Figure 2-11. Sleeve Rubber Step to Switch Assembly Notch
Figure 2-13. Alignment Dimples
94000390 2-13
RIGHT HAND GRIP
Removal
Remove grip using the appropriate procedure. See the service
manual.
Installation
Install grip using the appropriate procedure. See the service
manual with the following exceptions:
1. Visually align the right grip with the left grip.

NOTE
• See Figure 2-14. Center the switch housing split-line
between the alignment dimples in the handlebar.
• To prevent damage to wire leads, do not rotate housings
and switch assembly beyond alignment dimples.
2. Loosely install right switch control housing and front brake

master cylinder. See the service manual.
NOTE
Any gap between the switch housings should be on the bottom.
3. See the service manual to complete installation and adjust

throttle grip end play.
sm08130
Figure 2-14. Alignment Dimples
2-14 94000390
SEAT 2.9
SEAT AND PILLION sm07661

2
Pillion seat bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m 1
3
Pillion Removal 4
1. See Figure 2-15. Remove the thumbscrew and washer (1)
from top of rear fender.
2. Slide the pillion (2) back from the seat mounting studs (6).
3. Tuck the seat strap (3) under the flap at the rear of the
rider seat (5).
NOTE 5
• Verify that the pillion seat bracket screws are tightened to
40–60 in-lbs (4.5–6.8 N·m).
1. Pillion thumbscrew and washer
• See Figure 2-16. A decorative fender plug is installed under 2. Pillion
the pillion. Install the plug in place of the pillion thumbscrew 3. Seat strap
on the rear fender when riding without the pillion. 4. Thumb nuts (2)
5. Seat
Pillion Installation 6. Seat mounting studs
1. Remove seat strap from under rider seat flap. Figure 2-15. Seat and Pillion
2. Slide the pillion under the seat strap and engage the pillion om01594
bracket with the seat mounting studs.
3. Tighten thumbscrew with washer to secure pillion to rear
fender.
4. Pull up on pillion to verify that it is properly secured.
Rider Seat Removal

1. See Figure 2-15. Remove the pillion.
2. Remove the two thumb nuts from the rear of the seat.
3. Lift rear of seat. Pull rearward to remove.
4. If necessary, remove the seat strap.
Rider Seat Installation

1. If removed, install seat strap on studs.
2. Slide seat forward to engage the tongue on the frame into Figure 2-16. Rear Fender Plug (Under Pillion)
the slot in the seat. Lower the rear of the seat onto the
seat mounting studs.
3. Install seat mounting thumb nuts. Tighten securely.
4. Install the pillion, if desired.
5. Pull up on seat and pillion to verify that they are properly
secured.
94000390 2-15
REAR FASCIA 2.10
REMOVAL 3. Connect lamp connectors.
NOTE 4. Install saddlebags.

The fascia can be removed without removing the rear wheel
or any additional luggage rack, fender or saddlebag mounts.
1. Remove both saddlebags.

2. Unplug lamp connectors.
3. See Figure 2-17. Remove the three flanged nuts (3) from
each side and stiffener plates (2).
4. Repeat steps on opposite side.
5. Remove fascia.
6. If necessary: Remove the stud plate (1) and the
double-sided foam tape from the inside of the fender.
sm04286d
1. Stud plate
2. Stiffener plate (1 each side)
3. Flange nut and flat washer (3 each side)
Figure 2-17. Rear Fascia
INSTALLATION

Rear fascia flange nuts 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5 N·m
NOTE
The double-sided foam tape is not required for installation.
1. Install stud plates if removed.
a. Remove foam tape residue from the stud plate and

the inside of fender.
b. From inside the fender, hold the stud plate in place.
2. Install fascia.
a. Secure with three flange nuts and stiffener plate on

each side.
b. Tighten to 30–45 in-lbs (3.4–5 N·m).
2-16 94000390
LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET ASSEMBLY 2.11
REMOVAL 4. Remove screws (13) and washers (12). Hold stud plate
(7) from falling as screws are removed.
1. Remove rear wheel. See the service manual. 5. Remove license plate bracket (3) and reflector bracket
2. See Figure 2-18. Remove flange nut (5) and connector (10) from fender.
cover (6). 6. Remove gasket (8).
3. Separate connector (9) and remove terminals from 7. Remove screws (4) to remove cover (1) and light assembly
connector housing. (2) from license plate bracket.
sm06434a
1 2
3
4
13
12
11
10 5
7
6
1. Cover 8. Gasket
2. Light assembly 9. Connector
3. License plate bracket 10. Reflector bracket
4. Screw (2) 11. Reflector
5. Flange nut 12. Washer (2)
6. Connector cover 13. Screw (2)
7. Stud plate
Figure 2-18. License Plate Lamp and Bracket
INSTALLATION 5. Install wire terminals in connector housing. Wire polarity
is not important.
6. Mate harness connectors (9).
License plate lamp connector 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5.1 N·m
cover nut
7. Install connector cover (6). Secure with flange nut (5).
License plate lamp cover 57–69 in-lbs 6.4–7.8 N·m
Tighten to 30–45 in-lbs (3.4–5.1 N·m).
screw
1. See Figure 2-18. Assemble light assembly (2) and cover 8. Secure the wire harness with the clip on inside of fender.
(1) to license plate bracket (3). Tighten screws (4) to
57–69 in-lbs (6.4–7.8 N·m). 9. Install rear wheel. See the service manual.
2. While holding gasket (8) in place, feed lamp wires through WARNING
opening in fender.
Be sure that all lights and switches operate properly before
3. Align reflector bracket (10) with the license plate bracket operating motorcycle. Low visibility of rider can result in
(3). death or serious injury. (00316a)
4. Hold stud plate (7) in place and secure reflector and license 10. Check operation of all lamps.
plate brackets with washers (12) and screws (13). Tighten
screws securely.
94000390 2-17
REAR FENDER 2.12
PREPARING MOTORCYCLE
5. Check operation of all lamps.
1. Remove seat and pillion.

SEAT PAD REPLACEMENT
WARNING
1. Remove pillion.
To prevent accidental vehicle start-up, which could cause 2. Remove old pad using care to not damage finish on fender.
death or serious injury, disconnect negative (-) battery
cable before proceeding. (00048a) 3. Remove any remaining adhesive using 3M GENERAL
PURPOSE ADHESIVE REMOVER.
2. Remove negative battery cable. See the service manual. 4. See Figure 2-19. Align new pad as shown and install.
a. Align rear of pad (1) 2.09 in (53.1 mm) from centerline
3. Remove saddlebags. See the service manual. of pillion attachment hole.
4. Support motorcycle with rear wheel off the ground. b. Align centerline of pad (2) 1.89 in (48 mm) from
centerline of fender.
5. Remove rear wheel. See the service manual.
5. Install pillion.
REMOVAL sm07420
1. If necessary, disassemble fender while it is mounted in 1

the frame:
a. Remove the rear fascia. See REAR FASCIA 2
(Page 2-16).
b. Remove license plate lamp/bracket assembly. See
LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(Page 2-17).
NOTE
The fender can be removed with fascia, tail lamp, turn signal
bar and license plate bracket attached.
2. Remove the rear fender. See the service manual. 1. Rear edge of pad
2. Centerline offset
INSTALLATION
Figure 2-19. Rear Fender Pad Installation
1. Install the fender. See the service manual.
2. If removed, install:
a. Rear fascia. See REAR FASCIA (Page 2-16).
b. License plate lamp/bracket assembly. See LICENSE
PLATE LAMP/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (Page 2-17).
FINAL ASSEMBLY
1. Install rear wheel. See the service manual.
2. Connect negative battery cable. See the service manual.
3. Install seat and pillion. Pull up on the seat and pillion to be

sure they are secure.
4. Install saddlebags.
WARNING
operating motorcycle. Low visibility of rider can result in
death or serious injury. (00316a)
2-18 94000390
SADDLEBAGS 2.13
REMOVE om02297
1. Open saddlebag lid. 1 3

2. See Figure 2-20. Turn the mounting screws
counterclockwise to remove.
3. See Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-22. Disconnect audio
harness connector.
a. Allow saddlebag to tilt away from the vehicle.
b. Support saddlebag.
c. Pull out the locking bar. 1
d. Disconnect audio harness connector.
4. Remove saddlebag.
INSTALL
2
NOTE 1. Mounting screw with lever
Replace grommets if torn or deteriorated. 2. Saddlebag rail
3. Support bracket
1. See Figure 2-20. Place saddlebag in position on saddlebag Figure 2-20. Saddlebag Removal/Installation
rail (2).
om02063a
2. See Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-22. Support saddlebag and
connect audio harness connector.
NOTE
The rear mounting screw lever will interfere with the saddlebag
cover unless positioned with lever pointed downward.
3. Install mounting screws through grommets into support

bracket.
a. Tighten the mounting screws until the lever is pointed
downward between the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions
as shown.
4. Check that saddlebag is securely fastened.

a. Verify that the saddlebag bottom isolators properly
engage the lower support tube.
Figure 2-21. Right Connector Locking Bar
b. Pull on saddlebag to confirm that it is securely fastened.
om02062e
5. Close saddlebag lid.
Figure 2-22. Left Connector Locking Bar
94000390 2-19
LATCH HANDLE REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION

Latch handle screw 45–55 in-lbs 5.1–6.2 N·m
1. Open saddlebag.
2. See Figure 2-23. Remove screw (1) and nut (4).
3. Remove handle (2).
4. Inspect condition of grommet (3) on handle shaft. Replace

if necessary.
5. Install handle.
6. Install screw and nut. Tighten to 45–55 in-lbs

(5.1–6.2 N·m).
sm08478
3 2
5 4
1. Screw
2. Latch handle
3. Grommet
4. Nut
Figure 2-23. Latch Handle
2-20 94000390
MUFFLER END CAP 2.14
REPLACEMENT 8. Return muffler shield (2) to original orientation. Tighten
three clamps to 20–40 in-lbs (2.3–4.5 N·m).
Muffler end cap fasteners 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m sm05061a
Muffler shield clamps 20–40 in-lbs 2.3–4.5 N·m
1. Let motorcycle cool.
2. See Figure 2-24. Loosen three clamps on muffler shield

(2). Rotate shield to access all three fasteners. 1
2
3. Remove three fasteners (1) holding muffler end cap.
4. Remove end cap.
5. If necessary, remove and replace clip nut ring and clip 1

nuts.
1
NOTE
Install end cap with drain hole facing down.
1. Fastener (3)
6. Install clip nut ring and clip nuts in end cap. 2. Shield
Figure 2-24. Muffler End Cap Fastener Locations
7. Secure end cap with fasteners (1). Tighten to
84–108 in-lbs (9.5–12.2 N·m).
94000390 2-21
NOTES
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
3.1 SPECIFICATIONS: ENGINE ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 SERVICE WEAR LIMITS ...................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 3-3
ENGINE
NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS: ENGINE 3.1
GENERAL Table 3-3. Piston: Milwaukee-Eight™ 114
ITEM IN MM
NOTE
Oil control ring 0.008-0.028 0.200-0.700
This chapter provides only unique information for models
equipped with Milwaukee Eight 114 engines. See the service Ring side clearance:
manual for any specification not shown in the following tables. Top compression ring 0.0012-0.0027 0.030-0.068
Second compression ring 0.0012-0.0027 0.030-0.068
Table 3-1. Engine: Twin-Cooled™ Milwaukee-Eight 114™
Oil control ring 0.001-0.007 0.025-0.178
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Number of cylinders 2
Type 4-cycle, 45 degree
V-type
Single camshaft
Single balance shaft
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Bore 4.016 in 102 mm
Stroke 4.500 in 114.3 mm
Displacement 114 in3 1868 cm3
Fuel requirement Premium unleaded
Lubrication system Pressurized, dry sump
Cooling system Liquid-cooled cylinder heads
with lower fairing-mounted ra-
diators and
electric pump
Table 3-2. Oiling System

ITEM SPECIFICATION
Oil capacity with fil- Twin-Cooled (new system): 5.0 qt (4.5 L)
ter (service oil Service oil change: 4.75 qt (4.5 L)
change)
Preferred oil SCREAMIN' EAGLE SYN3 FULL SYN-
THETIC MOTORCYCLE LUBRICANT
20W50
Pump Twin gerotor, dual scavenge, crank
mounted and driven, internal oil pump,
dry sump
Pressure 30–38 psi (207–262 kPa) at 2000 rpm
and normal operating temperature of
230 °F (110 °C)
Filtration 5 micron media, filtered between pump
and engine
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
See the service manual for any specification not shown.
Table 3-3. Piston: Milwaukee-Eight™ 114

ITEM IN MM
Fit in cylinder 0.0025-0.0036 0.064-0.091
Piston pin fit (loose) 0.00024-0.0005 0.061-0.0127
Ring end gap:
Top compression ring 0.010-0.016 0.250-0.400
Second compression ring 0.016-24 0.400-0.600
94000390 3-1
SERVICE WEAR LIMITS 3.2
GENERAL
Use wear limits as guide to part replacement.
NOTE
See the service manual for any specification not shown.
Table 3-4. Cylinder Bore: Milwaukee-Eight™ 114

REPLACE IF WEAR EXCEEDS
ITEM
IN MM
Standard 4.020 102.11
Table 3-5. Pistons: Milwaukee-Eight™ 114

REPLACE IF WEAR
ITEM EXCEEDS
IN MM
Fit in cylinder (loose) 0.0041 0.104
Piston pin fit (loose) 0.0005 0.0127
Ring end gap Top compression 0.026 0.660
Second compression 0.034 0.864
Oil control ring rails 0.028 0.711
Ring side Top compression 0.0035 0.089
clearance Second compression 0.0035 0.089
Oil control ring rails 0.007 0.178
3-2 94000390
TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3
GENERAL Table 3-6. Compression Specifications: Twin Cam 110
ACR STATUS PSI kPa
Engine troubleshooting is the same as other Touring models
except for compression specifications. Refer to Table 3-6. See ACR connected 130-170 896-1173
the service manual for procedures. ACR disconnected 200-220 1379-1517
94000390 3-3
NOTES
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY ............................................................................ 4-2
FUEL SYSTEM
NOTES
CHAPTER
in this chapter.

Air cleaner backplate screws 55–60 in-lbs 6.2–6.8 N·m 4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY, In-
stall
Air cleaner breather bolts 22–24 ft-lbs 29.8–32.5 N·m 4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY, In-
stall
94000390 4-1
AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY 4.2
GENERAL 6. Tighten breather bolts to 22–24 ft-lbs (29.8–32.5 N·m).
For Asia-Pacific air filter assembly, see the service manual. 7. Install breather tubes (2). Secure to retainer tabs (6) on
backplate.
REMOVE
8. Install air cleaner element and cover. See Air Filter Element
1. Remove air cleaner element. See Air Filter Element (Page 1-5).
(Page 1-5).
2. See Figure 4-1. Remove breather tubes (2). sm08701
4
3. Remove breather bolts (3).
3
2
5. Remove backplate (4). Discard gasket (5).
INSTALL
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE 5

Air cleaner backplate screws 55–60 in-lbs 6.2–6.8 N·m
Air cleaner breather bolts 22–24 ft-lbs 29.8–32.5 N·m
1. See Figure 4-1. Position new gasket (5) on backplate (4). 1

6
2. Install backplate but do not tighten screws (1).
1. Screw (3) (captured)
3. Apply LOCTITE 565 THREAD SEALANT to threads of 2. Breather tubes (2)
breather bolts (3). 3. Breather bolts (2)
4. Backplate
4. Install breather bolts. 5. Gasket
6. Retainer tab (2)
5. Tighten screws (1) to 55–60 in-lbs (6.2–6.8 N·m). Figure 4-1. Air Cleaner Backplate
4-2 94000390
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
5.1 SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 CLUTCH ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
DRIVE
NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE 5.1
GENERAL
Lubricant
The preferred lubricant is SCREAMIN' EAGLE SYN3 FULL
SYNTHETIC MOTORCYCLE LUBRICANT 20W50.
Table 5-1. Primary Chaincase Lubricant

ITEM DRY FILL** WET FILL***
Oz L L Oz
Amount* 34 1.0 30 0.9
* Amount is approximate. Fill to bottom of pressure plate OD
with vehicle upright.
** Cover was removed and installed.
*** Lubricant was drained through the drain plug only.
Ratios
Table 5-2. Sprocket Teeth
DRIVE ITEM NUMBER OF
TEETH
Primary Engine 34
Clutch 46
Final Transmission 32
Rear wheel 68
Table 5-3. Drive Ratios

GEAR TRANSMISSION OVERALL
1 3.34 9.593
2 2.31 6.650
3 1.72 4.938
4 1.39 4.000
5 1.18 3.407
6 1.00 2.875
NOTE
• Transmission gear ratios indicate the number of mainshaft
revolutions required to drive the output sprocket one
revolution.
• Overall gear ratios indicate the number of engine revolutions
required to drive the rear wheel one revolution.
94000390 5-1
CLUTCH 5.2
CLUTCH REPAIR See Figure 5-1. Clutch disassembly and assembly is the same
for all Assist and Slip clutches except for plate and disc count.
NOTE See Clutch: Assist and Slip in the service manual.
Never mix plates and discs between 9-plate and 10-plate
clutches. Trike and CVO models use a 10-plate clutch.
sm08648
11
12 13
13 12
11
14
4
5
6
7
8
7
9
10
9
7
1. Bolt (3) 8. Narrow steel plate (1)

2. Stopper plate 9. Wide steel plate (8)
3. Mainshaft nut 10. Wide friction plate (7)
4. Coil spring (3) 11. Damper spring
5. Seat (3) 12. Damper spring seat
6. Pressure plate 13. Clutch hub
7. Narrow friction plate (3) 14. Clutch shell
Figure 5-1. Clutch Shell Assembly, 10-plate
5-2 94000390
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
6.1 SPECIFICATIONS: TRANSMISSION ................................................................................... 6-1
TRANSMISSION
NOTES
SPECIFICATIONS: TRANSMISSION 6.1
GENERAL Table 6-2. Transmission Gear Ratios
GEAR GEAR RATIO
Table 6-1. Transmission Lubricant First (low) 3.34
ITEM DATA Second 2.31
Type 6-speed constant mesh Cruise Drive™ Third 1.72
Lubricant SCREAMIN' EAGLE SYN3 FULL SYNTHET- Fourth 1.39
IC MOTORCYCLE LUBRICANT 20W50
Fifth 1.19
Capacity 32 fl oz (0.95 L)
Sixth (high) 1.00
NOTE
Transmission gear ratios indicate the number of mainshaft
revolutions required to drive the output sprocket one revolution.
94000390 6-1
NOTES
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
7.2 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION ............................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 FUEL TANK CONSOLE LAMP ............................................................................................. 7-3
7.4 LED TURN SIGNAL LAMPS ................................................................................................. 7-4
7.5 REAR LIGHTING .................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.6 FORK LOCK ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.7 DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES ........................................................................................... 7-7
7.8 RADIO SOFTWARE UPDATE .............................................................................................. 7-8
7.9 RADIO ................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.10 AUDIO AMPLIFIER ........................................................................................................... 7-11
7.11 PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 7-13
7.12 POWER LOCKS ............................................................................................................... 7-16
7.13 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS .................................................................................................... 7-20
7.14 NO VEHICLE POWER, DTC U0140 ................................................................................. 7-24
7.15 POWER LOCK DIAGNOSTICS ........................................................................................ 7-28
7.16 REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................. 7-37
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................ 7-41
7.18 RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................................................... 7-46
7.19 BACKLIT HAND CONTROLS INOPERATIVE .................................................................. 7-50
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................................................................... 7-51
7.21 AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................... 7-54
7.22 RADIO DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................................................................... 7-56
ELECTRICAL
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 .............................................................................. 7-67
7.24 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 .............................................................................. 7-86
NOTES
CHAPTER
in this chapter.

ABS caddy screw 36–40 in-lbs 4.1–4.5 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Amplifier, rear, screw 15–20 in-lbs 1.7–2.3 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Rear Amplifier
Amplifier bracket screws 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier mounting nuts 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier mounting screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–4 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier studs 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Battery tray screws 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Console medallion lamp screws 20–30 in-lbs 2.3–3.4 N·m 7.3 FUEL TANK CONSOLE LAMP, Lighted Fuel
Tank Emblem
Dash panel screws 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m 7.7 DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES, Installation
Fork lock screws 36–60 in-lbs 4.1–6.8 N·m 7.6 Fork Lock, Fork Lock
Headset DIN connector 7–9 in-lbs 0.8–1 N·m 7.9 Radio, Rider Headset Connector
Ignition coil screws 32–40 in-lbs 3.6–4.5 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Rear fascia lamp screws 14–18 in-lbs 1.6–2 N·m 7.5 Rear Lighting, Rear Fascia Lamp
Relay connector screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–3.9 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Saddlebag actuator screws 30–35 in-lbs 3.4–3.9 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Actuator: Saddlebag
Saddlebag cam screw 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Actuator: Saddlebag
Saddlebag harness connector screws 35–40 in-lbs 4–4.5 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag Audio
Harness Removal and Installation
Saddlebag harness connector screws 35–40 in-lbs 4–4.5 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag Audio
Harness Removal and Installation
Saddlebag speaker grille screw 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag Speakers
Saddlebag speaker screw 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag Speakers
Tail lamp lens screws 20–24 in-lbs 2.3–2.7 N·m 7.5 Rear Lighting, Tail Lamp Lens: Canadian
Models
Tweeter and midrange speaker as- 9–13 in-lbs 1–1.4 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Front Fairing
sembly screws Speakers
XM antenna bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m 7.9 Radio, XM Antenna and Bracket
94000390 7-1
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION 7.2
FUSES AND RELAYS om01761b
See Figure 7-1. Remove left side cover to locate fuse and relay
block and main fuse. See Figure 7-2 for fuse assignments.
1
3
1. Fuse block cover

2. Main fuse
3. Press tabs to remove
Figure 7-1. Fuse Block (under left side cover)
sm08122
1 2 3
4 5 6 11
9
7 8
10
50
1. Radio power (30 A) 7. P&A relay

2. System power (7.5 A) 8. Cooling relay
3. Battery (5 A) 9. Spare (7.5 A)
4. P&A (20 A) 10. Spare (20 A)
5. Cooling (15 A) 11. Main fuse (50 A)
6. Spare (5 A)
Figure 7-2. Fuses and Relays
7-2 94000390
FUEL TANK CONSOLE LAMP 7.3
LIGHTED FUEL TANK EMBLEM sm07411a
1
Console medallion lamp 20–30 in-lbs 2.3–3.4 N·m
screws
Removal
NOTE
The LED console lamp contains no serviceable parts.
1. Remove fuel tank console (2). See the service manual. 2

2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3
3. See Figure 7-3. Remove screws (5). Remove console
lamp (4) and medallion (3).
4
Installation
1. See Figure 7-3. Install medallion (3) and console lamp (4).
5
Tighten screws (5) to 20–30 in-lbs (2.3–3.4 N·m).
2. Connect electrical connector. 1. Console insert

2. Console
3. Install fuel tank console (2). See the service manual. 3. Medallion
4. Console lamp
5. Screw (2)
Console Insert
Figure 7-3. Fuel Tank Console
NOTE
Console insert is secured with double-faced tape.
1. See Figure 7-3. Carefully pry console insert (1) from fuel
tank console (2).
2. Remove all residual adhesive using 3M GENERAL
3. Carefully align new console insert. Press to secure.
94000390 7-3
LED TURN SIGNAL LAMPS 7.4
LED ASSEMBLY
Remove
1. See Figure 7-4. Remove lens (1).
2. Remove LED assembly (2) from lamp housing.
3. Separate connector (3).
Install
1. Mate connector.
2. Align LED assembly to housing. Press evenly until fully

seated.
3. Install lens.
WARNING
operating motorcycle. Low visibility of rider can result in
death or serious injury. (00316a)
4. Check operation of all lamps.
sm08503
3
1. Lens
2. LED assembly
3. Connector
Figure 7-4. LED Turn Signal Lamp
7-4 94000390
REAR LIGHTING 7.5
REAR FASCIA LAMP WARNING
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE operating motorcycle. Low visibility of rider can result in
Rear fascia lamp screws 14–18 in-lbs 1.6–2 N·m death or serious injury. (00316a)
Removal 4. Check operation of all lamps.

1. Remove rear fascia. See REAR FASCIA (Page 2-16).
2. See Figure 7-5. Remove three screws. Remove fascia sm08081a
lamp assembly.
3. Inspect foam tape on sides of light and replace if damaged.
Installation
1. Install fascia lamp assembly. Tighten to 14–18 in-lbs
(1.6–2 N·m).
2. Install rear fascia. See REAR FASCIA (Page 2-16).
sm08077a
Figure 7-6. Tail Lamp Lens
Figure 7-5. Fascia Lamp Fasteners

TAIL LAMP LENS: CANADIAN MODELS

Tail lamp lens screws 20–24 in-lbs 2.3–2.7 N·m
Removal
1. Remove screws securing tail lamp assembly to base. See
the service manual.
2. Remove gasket from lamp assembly
3. See Figure 7-6. Press tabs to remove lens from tail lamp
assembly.
Installation
1. Install gasket to tail lamp assembly.
2. Align lens to tail lamp assembly. Insert tail lamp assembly

to lens. Press lens until fully seated on base.
3. Install tail lamp assembly to base. Tighten to 20–24 in-lbs

(2.3–2.7 N·m).
94000390 7-5
FORK LOCK 7.6
FORK LOCK

Fork lock screws 36–60 in-lbs 4.1–6.8 N·m
Removal
1. Remove main fuse.
2. Remove dash panel. See DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES
(Page 7-7).
3. See Figure 7-7. Disconnect fork lock connector (5).
4. Rotate inner fairing. See the service manual.
5. Remove screws (1). Remove fork lock (3).
sm08084
1
1
5
2 4
3
1. Screw and washer (not shown)

2. Dash panel switch connector, left
3. Fork lock
4. Dash panel switch connector, right
5. Fork lock connector
Figure 7-7. Fork Lock
Installation
1. See Figure 7-7. Install the fork lock (3).
2. Install screws (1). Tighten to 36–60 in-lbs (4.1–6.8 N·m).
3. Rotate inner fairing into position. See the service manual.
4. Install fork lock connector (5).
5. Install dash panel. See DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES

(Page 7-7).
6. Install main fuse.
7-6 94000390
DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES 7.7
REMOVE
WARNING
To prevent spray of fuel, purge system of high-pressure
fuel before supply line is disconnected. Gasoline is
extremely flammable and highly explosive, which could
result in death or serious injury. (00275a)
1. Purge and disconnect fuel supply line. See the service

manual.
2. Remove screws securing fuel tank. See the service
manual.
3. Slide fuel tank rearward.
4. See Figure 7-8. Remove two screws (1) to release dash
panel.
5. Remove dash panel and disconnect dash panel switch
connectors (2).
6. See the service manual for switch service.
sm07912
1 1
2
1. Dash panel screws (2)
2. Dash panel switch connectors (not visible)
Figure 7-8. Dash Panel Screws
INSTALLATION

Dash panel screws 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m
1. Mate dash panel switch connectors.
2. Install dash panel over ignition switch housing.
3. Secure dash panel with two screws. Tighten to

25–30 in-lbs (2.8–3.4 N·m).
4. Secure fuel tank in position. See the service manual.
5. Verify operation of dash panel switches.
94000390 7-7
RADIO SOFTWARE UPDATE 7.8
GENERAL
Update the BOOM! Box Infotainment software after replacing

the GPS navigation module or the receiver module.
UPDATING RADIO SOFTWARE
See the BOOM! Box owner's manual for radio software update
information.
7-8 94000390
RADIO 7.9
GENERAL sm08099
1
Servicing the radio is similar to the Touring models. This model 2
has an extra amplifier and mount. See Audio Amplifier
(Page 7-11) for amplifier and mount service. See the service
manual for further audio system service.
HIDDEN ANTENNA
3
1. Remove outer fairing. See the service manual.
2. Disconnect antenna connector from radio.
3. See Figure 7-9. Remove pads (2). Remove any residual
adhesive with 3M GENERAL PURPOSE ADHESIVE
REMOVER.
4. Remove antenna module (1) and cable (3). Remove any 4
residual adhesive with 3M GENERAL PURPOSE
ADHESIVE REMOVER.
5. Adhere new antenna module and cable into place.
5
6. Install new pads (2).
7. Connect antenna connector to radio.
8. Install outer fairing. See the service manual. 6
sm08479
1. XM antenna
2. Bracket
2 2 3. Screws
4. Antenna wire
1 5. Screws
6. Antenna connector
Figure 7-10. XM Module
3 3 XM ANTENNA AND BRACKET

XM antenna bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m
Remove
1. Antenna module 1. Remove main fuse.
2. Pad (6)
3. Antenna cable 2. Remove outer fairing. See the service manual.
Figure 7-9. Hidden Antenna 3. Figure 7-10. Remove antenna connector (6).
XM SATELLITE RADIO MODULE 4. Gently pry the antenna (1) from the mounting bracket (2).
5. Remove bracket screws (3) to detach bracket.
2. See Figure 7-10. Remove antenna connector (6). Installation
3. Remove screws (5) and pull module from radio chassis. 1. See Figure 7-10. Secure XM antenna bracket (2) with
screws (3). Tighten to 40–60 in-lbs (4.5–6.8 N·m).
4. Transfer XM module into new radio immediately. If new
radio is not available, place XM module in a static proof
bag and store in a safe place. 2. Install antenna:
5. Install screws. Tighten securely. a. Clean the top of the antenna bracket with isopropyl
6. Install antenna connector. alcohol. Allow to dry completely.
7. Install outer fairing. b. Remove adhesive backing from the antenna.
NOTE
After installing the antenna, avoid contact with or movement
of the antenna for 20 minutes.
94000390 7-9
c. With the wire lead toward the front, center the
antenna over the bracket. Press and hold for 60
seconds.
3. Mate XM radio antenna connector (6) to the module.
4. Install outer fairing. See the service manual.
XM RADIO ACTIVATION
See the BOOM! Box owner's manual for XM radio activation

information.
RIDER HEADSET CONNECTOR

HD-51656 DIN CONNECTOR TOOL

Headset DIN connector 7–9 in-lbs 0.8–1 N·m
Removal
2. Using DIN CONNECTOR TOOL (PART NUMBER:
HD-51656), rotate lock ring counterclockwise to loosen.
3. Remove lock ring and cap.
4. Disconnect headset connector.
5. Remove harness assembly.
Installation
1. Insert headset connector through hole in inner fairing.
2. Slide weather cap over headset connector.
3. With the notches on the outboard side, thread lock ring

onto headset connector.
4. Using DIN CONNECTOR TOOL (PART NUMBER:

HD-51656), tighten to 7–9 in-lbs (0.8–1 N·m).
5. Test operation of headset connector.
7-10 94000390
AUDIO AMPLIFIER 7.10
AMPLIFIER REMOVAL INSTALLATION
1. Remove main fuse. FASTENER TORQUE VALUE
2. Remove outer fairing. See the service manual. Amplifier bracket screws 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m
Amplifier mounting nuts 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m
NOTE
Amplifier mounting screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–4 N·m
See Figure 7-11. Use a flat blade screwdriver to pull the latch
down to release the connector. Amplifier studs 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m
1. See Figure 7-12. If installing mount (5):

3. See Figure 7-12. Unplug wiring harness connector from
amplifier (1).
a. Place mount into position on inner fairing bracket.
4. Remove nuts (2) securing amplifier bracket (3) to mount
(5). b. Install screws (6). Tighten to 25–35 in-lbs
5. Lift amplifier and pull studs (9) from grommets (8) to (2.8–4 N·m).
release.
2. If amplifier bracket (3) was removed from amplifier (1):
6. To remove mount: Remove screws (6) securing mount to
inner fairing bracket.
a. Place amplifier bracket on amplifier.
ed01617a
b. Install screws (4). Tighten to 84–108 in-lbs
(9.5–12.2 N·m).
3. Install studs (9) if removed. Tighten to 84–108 in-lbs

(9.5–12.2 N·m).
4. Install studs into grommets (8).
5. Install nuts (2). Tighten to 72–96 in-lbs (8.1–10.8 N·m).
6. Plug wiring harness connector into amplifier socket.
Figure 7-11. Connector [149] Release Latch 8. Install main fuse.
9. Test sound system for proper operation.
94000390 7-11
sm08089
2
1
6
8
1. Amplifier 6. Screw (4)

2. Nut (2) 7. Pad (4)
3. Amplifier bracket 8. Grommet (2)
4. Screw (2) 9. Stud (2)
5. Mount
Figure 7-12. Amplifier and Mount
7-12 94000390
PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM 7.11
FRONT FAIRING SPEAKERS Removal
1. Remove the saddlebag. See SADDLEBAGS (Page 2-19).
2. See Figure 7-14. Disconnect audio harness connectors
Tweeter and midrange 9–13 in-lbs 1–1.4 N·m
(4).
speaker assembly screws
3. Remove grille screws (3).
Front speaker servicing is similar to the Touring models except
removal and installation of the tweeter and midrange speaker 4. Remove speaker grille (1) from saddlebag lid (5).
assembly. See the service manual for front fairing woofer 5. Remove speaker screws (2).
removal and installation.
6. Remove speaker (6) from saddlebag lid.
Tweeter and Midrange Speaker Removal
Installation
1. Remove outer fairing and speaker enclosure. See the
service manual. 1. See Figure 7-14. Install speaker (6).
2. See Figure 7-13. Disconnect audio harness connector (3).
2. Install speaker screws (2). Tighten to 10–15 in-lbs
3. Remove screws (2). (1.1–1.7 N·m).
4. Remove tweeter and midrange speaker assembly (1) from
inner fairing (4). 3. Install speaker grille (1).
Tweeter and Midrange Speaker Installation 4. Install grille screws (2). Tighten to 10–15 in-lbs
(1.1–1.7 N·m).
1. See Figure 7-13. Install tweeter and midrange speaker
assembly (1) through inner fairing (4). 5. Connect audio harness connectors (4).
2. Install screws (2). Tighten to 9–13 in-lbs (1–1.4 N·m). 6. Install the saddlebag. See SADDLEBAGS (Page 2-19).
3. Connect audio harness connector (3).

sm07301
4. Install outer fairing and speaker enclosure. See the service 1

manual.
sm08469 6
5 2
4 3
4
2
3
1. Grille
1. Tweeter and midrange speaker assembly 2. Speaker screw (4)
2. Screw (3) 3. Grille screw (4)
3. Audio harness connector 4. Audio harness connectors
4. Inner fairing 5. Saddlebag lid
Figure 7-13. Tweeter and Midrange Speaker Assembly 6. Speaker
SADDLEBAG SPEAKERS Figure 7-14. Saddlebag Speaker
REAR AMPLIFIER
Saddlebag speaker grille 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m FASTENER TORQUE VALUE
screw Amplifier, rear, screw 15–20 in-lbs 1.7–2.3 N·m
Saddlebag speaker screw 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m
Removal
1. Remove left saddlebag liner.
94000390 7-13
2. See Figure 7-15. Remove clips (2).
sm08474
3. Remove cover (3). 1
4. Disconnect audio harness connector (1).
8
5. Remove screws (8). 2

6. Remove amplifier (5) from bracket. 9
3
7. If necessary, carefully pry bracket (7) from saddlebag (4).
Remove any residual adhesive with 3M GENERAL 10
Installation
1. See Figure 7-15. Inspect pads (9). Replace parts if 7
necessary. 4
2. If removed, install new double-sided tape to bracket (7). 5
Carefully position bracket and stick in place.
6
3. Install audio amplifier, making sure the studs (6) and

grommets (10) are properly engaged.
5. Connect audio harness connector (1). 1. Audio harness connector

2. Clip (3)
6. Install cover (3) and clips (2). 3. Cover
4. Saddlebag
5. Amplifier
7. Install saddlebag liner.
6. Stud (2)
7. Bracket
8. Screw (2)
9. Pad (2)
10. Grommet (2)
Figure 7-15. Rear Amplifier
SADDLEBAG AUDIO HARNESS REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION

Saddlebag harness connector 35–40 in-lbs 4–4.5 N·m
screws
Left Saddlebag Harness

2. Remove rear audio amplifier. See Premium Sound System,

Rear Amplifier (Page 7-13).
3. See Figure 7-16. Disconnect speaker connectors (2).
4. Disconnect amplifier connector (1).
5. Remove harness from clips.
7. Remove left saddlebag audio harness connector (3) from

saddlebag (5).
8. Insert new left saddlebag audio harness connector in

saddlebag.
7-14 94000390
NOTE sm08476
To prevent damage to wire harness, make sure that there is 1
2
slack in the harness when the saddlebag lid is fully open.
9. Install screws. Tighten to 35–40 in-lbs (4–4.5 N·m). 5

10. Install harness in clips.
3
11. Connect amplifier connector (1).
12. Connect speaker connectors (2).
13. Install rear audio amplifier. See Premium Sound System,

Rear Amplifier (Page 7-13).
Right Saddlebag Harness 4

1. Amplifier connector
2. See Figure 7-17. Disconnect speaker connectors (2). 2. Speaker connector (2)
3. Audio harness connector (2)
3. Remove harness from clips. 4. Screw (4)
5. Left saddlebag
4. Remove screws (3). Figure 7-16. Left Saddlebag Audio Harness
sm08477
5. Remove right saddlebag audio harness connector (1) from
saddlebag (4). 1
2
6. Insert new right saddlebag audio harness in saddlebag.
4
NOTE
To prevent damage to wire harness, make sure that there is
slack in the harness when the saddlebag lid is fully open. 3
7. Install screws. Tighten to 35–40 in-lbs (4–4.5 N·m).
8. Install harness in clips.
9. Connect speaker connectors (2).
1. Audio harness connector

2. Speaker connector (2)
3. Screw (4)
4. Right saddlebag
Figure 7-17. Right Saddlebag Audio Harness
94000390 7-15
POWER LOCKS 7.12
ACTUATOR: SADDLEBAG 7. See Figure 7-19. Connect power lock connector.
FASTENER TORQUE VALUE 8. See Figure 7-18. Secure wire harness with harness
retention flap.
Saddlebag actuator screws 30–35 in-lbs 3.4–3.9 N·m
Saddlebag cam screw 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m
9. Install saddlebag liner.
Remove
10. Test power lock operation.
1. See Figure 7-18. Remove wire harness from harness
retention flap.
sm08438
2. See Figure 7-19. Separate the power lock connector.
3. Remove saddlebag liner.
4. Remove saddlebag tether from saddlebag cover.
5. See Figure 7-20. Remove wiring (4) from clips (3).
6. Pull wiring, connector and grommet (1) through hole in
saddlebag.
7. See Figure 7-21. Remove screw (2) securing cam (1) to
latch assembly (8).
8. Remove screws (5) securing actuator (6) to latch assembly.
Install
Figure 7-18. Harness Retention Flap
1. Prepare harness of new actuator assembly.
om01823
a. Record locations of wires in connector.
b. Remove connector housing from terminals of new

actuator assembly. See the electrical diagnostic
manual.
c. Remove grommet from harness.
d. Cut wires to length using original assembly as a

guide.
e. Install new terminals on harness.
f. Install connector housing.
2. See Figure 7-21. Place actuator (6) into position on latch

assembly (8).
Figure 7-19. Saddlebag Power Lock Connector
NOTE
See Figure 7-22. Cam socket (1) must fit over cam drive (2).
NOTE
See Figure 7-20. Route saddlebag wiring tightly along the
inside edge of the saddlebag. Leave extra wiring at hinge to
prevent stress on wiring when cover is opened.
4. See Figure 7-21. Install cam (1) and screw (2). Tighten to
25–30 in-lbs (2.8–3.4 N·m).
5. Install wiring (4) into clips (3).
6. Pull connector through hole in saddlebag. Install grommet

(1). Install cable strap (2) on wiring.
7-16 94000390
sm08079
1
2
3
1. Grommet
2. Cable strap
3. Clips
4. Wiring
Figure 7-20. Saddlebag Actuator Wiring
sm08669
5
2 3 6 8
1
1. Cam 5. Screw (3)

2. Screw 6. Actuator
3. Cable 7. Wiring
4. Clip 8. Latch assembly
Figure 7-21. Saddlebag Lock Actuator
KEY FOB
sm08080

1 See Figure 7-23. The motorcycle is shipped with two key fobs.
The key fobs and PIN must be electronically assigned by the
dealer using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER:
2 HD-48650). Only two fobs can be assigned to a motorcycle at
any one time. Replacement fobs must be electronically
assigned using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER:
HD-48650).
A unique number is attached to a tag on the key fobs. Write

1. Cam socket
the key fob number in the space provided in the front of this
2. Cam drive
manual.
Figure 7-22. Actuator Cam
94000390 7-17
Power Locks om02133
The key fob remotely locks and unlocks the fork lock switch, 2
saddlebags and Tour-Pak. The key fob can actuate the locks
while the motorcycle is on or off. The range for power lock
operation is approximately 40 ft (12 m).
Security System
The security system disarms when an assigned key fob is
within range. Always carry the fob when riding, loading, fueling,
moving, parking or servicing the motorcycle. The range for
disarming the security system is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m)
from the center of the motorcycle.
Riding away without the fob: The odometer window

temporarily shows NO FOB if the motorcycle is ridden away 1
without the key fob. To restart a motorcycle without a key fob,
disarm the security system with the PIN.
Remove key fob when parked: Always lock the fork and
remove the key fob when parked. Do not leave the key fob
1. Thumbnail slot
attached to the handlebars or stored in a luggage compartment.
2. Battery
If the key fob is within range, the motorcycle can be started
and the alarm will not activate. Figure 7-24. Fob Battery
RELAY BRACKET
Replacing the Battery
Replace the fob battery every year. FASTENER TORQUE VALUE
ABS caddy screw 36–40 in-lbs 4.1–4.5 N·m
1. See Figure 7-24. Slowly turn a thin blade in the thumbnail
slot (1) on the side of the fob to separate the two halves. Battery tray screws 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m
Ignition coil screws 32–40 in-lbs 3.6–4.5 N·m
2. Remove the battery (2). Discard or recycle according to
Relay connector screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–3.9 N·m
local regulations.
3. Verify that the metal tabs will firmly contact battery. Bend Removal
up slightly if necessary.
1. Remove right saddlebag.
4. Install a new battery (CR2032) with the positive side up.
2. Remove right side cover.
5. Align the two halves of the fob. Snap the halves together.
3. Remove battery. See the service manual.
om02122
4. Remove ignition coil and battery hold-down bracket. See
1 the service manual.
5. See Figure 7-25. Remove screw (8) securing ABS caddy
2 (1) to battery tray (6).
6. Push out clips (10).
7. Remove screws (7) securing battery tray to frame.
8. Remove relays (2).
9. Remove the two screws (5) and washers (4) holding relay
connectors (3) to the relay bracket (9).
1. Lock button NOTE
2. Unlock button Lift the ABS caddy while pressing down on the battery tray to
Figure 7-23. Key Fob separate the caddy from the tray dovetails.
10. Disengage latch on bottom of caddy. Separate the caddy

from the tray.
NOTE
The relay bracket can be worked out between the rear of the
ABS caddy and the frame.
11. Remove the relay bracket.
7-18 94000390
Installation 6. Install the relay connectors (3) with screws (5) and washers
(4). Tighten to 25–35 in-lbs (2.8–3.9 N·m).
1. See Figure 7-25. Install relay bracket (9) between ABS
caddy (1) and battery tray (6).
7. Install the relays (2).
2. Install clips (10).

8. Install battery hold-down bracket and ignition coil. Tighten
to 32–40 in-lbs (3.6–4.5 N·m). See the service manual.
3. Engage ABS caddy into dovetails while lifting battery tray
up into position. Verify latch on bottom of caddy is
9. Install battery. See the service manual.
engaged.
10. Install the side cover.
4. Install the screw (8). Tighten to 36–40 in-lbs (4.1–4.5 N·m).
11. Install the saddlebag.
5. Install the battery tray screws (7). Tighten to 72–96 in-lbs
(8.1–10.8 N·m).
sm08702
6
7
5 8
9
1
10
1. ABS caddy 6. Battery tray

2. Relay (2) 7. Screw (4)
3. Relay connector (3) 8. Screw
4. Washer (2) 9. Relay bracket
5. Screw (2) 10. Clips (2)
Figure 7-25. Power Lock Relay Bracket
94000390 7-19
INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS 7.13
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Before diagnosing a concern, perform a general functional test
of the vehicle to verify the concern. This will also identify any
Use initial diagnostics as a starting point to efficiently other issues that may affect diagnostics. Use the procedures
troubleshoot concerns. A basic understanding of electronics in this chapter for initial diagnostics.
and a general knowledge of the vehicle are necessary to
effectively use this manual. NOTE
• "IGN ON" means engine stop switch is set to RUN (although
NOTE engine is not running).
• Certain diagnostic procedures require part removal. See
the service manual for details. • When working through a diagnostic procedure, follow the
steps in the order instructed. Never jump to a test in another
• Certain diagnostic procedures require the use of special procedure. All "Go to test" statements refer to a test in that
tools. See diagnostic tools in the electrical diagnostic procedure.
manual.
• To turn IGN ON the fob must be present while you press
• Certain diagnostic procedures require the use of tests that the engine stop switch.
have precise instructions. See diagnostics and
troubleshooting in the electrical diagnostic manual.
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and Fault Conditions Priority Table
PRIORITY
DTC ORDER FAULT CONDITION SOLUTION
Front left speaker shorted to-
B1337 314 gether RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1339 316 Front left speaker shorted low RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1340 317 Front left speaker shorted high RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
Rear left speaker shorted to-
B1343 320 Rear left speaker shorted low RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1344 321 Rear left speaker shorted high RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
Front right speaker shorted to-
B1347 324 Front right speaker shorted low RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1348 325 Front right speaker shorted high RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
Rear right speaker shorted to-
B1351 328 Rear right speaker shorted low RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1352 329 Rear right speaker shorted high RADIO DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-56)
B1401 352 AMP voltage low AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-54)
B1402 353 AMP voltage high AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-54)
AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
B1403 354 Speaker output DC offset AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1404 355 Internal thermal shutdown error AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1405 372 EQ correlation error AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1406 373 Invalid or missing EQ AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1410 356 Channel 1 speaker open AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1411 357 Channel 1 speaker shorted low AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
B1412 358 Channel 1 speaker shorted high AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
Channel 1 speaker shorted to- AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
B1413 359 gether AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
7-20 94000390
PRIORITY
B2151 187 Left rear turn signal output open REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
Left rear turn signal output
B2153 188 shorted low REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
Left rear turn signal output
B2154 189 overloaded REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
Right rear turn signal output
B2156 190 open REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
B2158 191 shorted low REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
B2159 192 overloaded REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-37)
B2161 166 Brake lamp output open STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
B2163 167 Brake lamp output shorted low STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
B2164 168 Brake lamp output overloaded STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
Running lights output shorted
B2168 142 low RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-46)
Running lights output over-
B2169 142 loaded RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-46)
B2188 222 G3 output shorted low Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
B2193 224 H4 output shorted low Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
Rear brake switch shorted low
B2223 165 (light on) STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
B2231 268 Fork locked w/VSS Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
B2232 269 Fork lock shorted high Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
B2233 270 Fork lock shorted low Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
Fork lock detected w/option
B2234 312 disabled Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
94000390 7-21
PRIORITY
B2235 313 Fork lock configuration invalid Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
C0077 273 Low tire pressure TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
C0083 281 TPMS malfunction TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
Front TPMS communication
C2000 274 fault TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
Rear TPMS communication
C2001 275 fault TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
C2003 277 Front TPMS sensor fault TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
C2004 278 Rear TPMS sensor fault TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
C2006 272 TPMS IDs not loaded TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
Low tire pressure thresholds
C2007 280 not loaded TPMS DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-51)
U0140 2 Lost comm w/BCM No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140 (Page 7-24)
SYMPTOMS
If no DTCs are present, address any symptoms indicating a

malfunction. Refer to Table 7-2.
Table 7-2. Symptom Table
SECTION SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
No Vehicle Power No vehicle power No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140 (Page 7-24)
Power Lock Diagnostics Power locks inoperative Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
Power locks dash switch inoper- Power Lock Diagnostics (Page 7-28)
ative
Stop Lamp Stop lamp inoperative STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
Stop lamp always on STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-41)
Running Lamps Running lamps inoperative RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS (Page 7-46)
Backlit Hand Control Buttons Backlit hand control buttons in- BACKLIT HAND CONTROLS INOPERATIVE (Page 7-50)
operative
7-22 94000390
Table 7-2. Symptom Table
SECTION SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Audio All speakers inoperative AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
Left fairing woofer speaker low AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
or no audio
Left fairing tweeter/mid speaker AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
low or no audio
Both left speakers low or no AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
audio
Right fairing woofer speaker AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
low or no audio
Right fairing tweeter/mid AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
speaker low or no audio
Both right speakers low or no AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 (Page 7-67)
audio
All speakers inoperative AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
Left saddlebag woofer speaker AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
low or no audio
Left saddlebag tweeter/mid AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
Both left speakers low or no AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
audio
Right saddlebag woofer speak- AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
er low or no audio
Right saddlebag tweeter/mid AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
Both right speakers low or no AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 (Page 7-86)
audio
94000390 7-23
NO VEHICLE POWER, DTC U0140 7.14
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION on any module that is not communicating effectively on the
CAN bus network. At least two modules will set a lost
The CAN bus circuit provides a means for the ECM, communication DTC when one module has lost the ability to
instruments, BCM, hand control modules, the ABS module (if communicate on the CAN bus.When two or more modules are
equipped), radio and amplifiers (if equipped) to communicate setting the same U-code this indicates a problem with the
their current status. When all operating parameters on the CAN device the code is set against. If two or more modules are
bus are within specifications, a state of health message is sent intermittently setting the same U-code, it indicates an
between the components. intermittent problem with the device the code is set against or
intermittent CAN, power or ground wires to the device.
NOTE
The BCM supplies power to several systems on the vehicle.
"IGN ON" means engine stop switch is set to RUN (although When testing for a short to voltage, perform all tests before
engine is not running). disconnecting the BCM to keep from powering down systems
on the vehicle. If the short to voltage goes away when the BCM
The CAN bus is made up of two circuits. The (W/R) is the CAN is disconnected, test for continuity between the circuit in
bus high circuit and the (W/BK) is the CAN bus low circuit. Both question and BCM [242B] terminals F4, J3, L3, L4 and M2 to
of these circuits show around 2.5V when measured between verify the tested circuit is not shorted to one of these circuits.
each of the circuits and ground with the IGN ON. These circuits If continuity is present, repair shorted circuit instead of replacing
are connected to each module on the CAN bus network. A fault the BCM.
on either one of these circuits will cause several modules to
set "U" codes and may cause a complete loss of Historic U-codes may be found if battery power has been lost
communication between all modules. for any reason or if the main or battery fuse have been
disconnected and reconnected. Disconnecting DTII before
Table 7-3. Code Description powering down vehicle also sets a historic U-code.
DTC DESCRIPTION Connector Information

Lost communication with BCM, set by speedo-
For additional information about the connectors in the following
U0140 meter, ECM or ABS
diagram(s) and diagnostic procedure(s), see CONNECTORS
(Page A-1).
Diagnostic Tips
Modules must have power in order to communicate on the
CAN bus. It is important to check for good power and ground
7-24 94000390
em01969
IM Amplifier
Battery Fuse
Amp Power
Amp Power
CAN High
CAN High
CAN Low
CAN Low
Ground
Ground
Ground
LHCM RHCM
Battery Fuse
Battery Fuse
[39A] 8 2 5 7 9 10 11 16 17 18 [149A]
CAN High
CAN High
CAN Low
CAN Low
Ground
Ground
[39B] 8 2 5 7 9 10 11 16 17 18 [149B]
W/R
W/R
W/BK
W/BK
R/O
BK/GN
R/PK
R/PK
BK
BK
[24C] 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 [22C-1]
[24D] 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 [22D-1]
W/R
W/BK
R/O
BK/GN
W/R
W/BK
BK/GN
R/O [24B] [24A] [22A-1] [22B-1]
R/O 1 1 R/O R/O 1 1 R/O

BK/GN 2 2 BK/GN BK/GN 2 2 BK/GN
W/R 3 3 W/R W/R 3 3 W/R
W/BK 4 4 W/BK W/BK 4 4 W/BK
BK/GN
W/BK
R/PK
W/R
R/O
BK
BK
[1A] 3 2 4 5 6 14 15
[1B] 3 2 4 5 6 14 15
W/R
W/BK
R/O
BK/GN
R/PK
BK
BK
[78A-1] [78B-1] [242B] [242A]
ECM BCM
CAN Low 13 13 W/BK W/BK E2 E2 CAN Low
(BK) CAN High 14 14 W/R W/R D2 D2 CAN High
Ground 10 10 BK/GN BK/GN G4 G4 Ground
R/GN L3 L3 System Power
R 1 1 Battery Power
Ground 10 10 BK/GN
(GY) Battery Fuse 18 18 R/O
[259B] [259A]
System Power 16 16 R/GN
W/R 1
[78A-2] [78B-2] DLC
W/BK 3
(BN) Ground 10 10 BK/GN
[91A]
[78A-3] [78B-3]
W/R A1 A1 CAN High
[166A] [166B]
ABS ECU W/BK A2 A2 CAN Low
Battery Power 1 1 R BK L3 L3 Ground
Ground 9 9 BK BK L4 L4 Ground
CAN Low 10 10 W/BK R/PK M3 M3 Radio Fuse
Battery Power 17 17 R R/PK M4 M4 Radio Fuse
CAN High 18 18 W/R Radio
R/GN
R/PK
R/O
Ground 26 26 BK/GN [27B] [27A]

R
Battery Main System Power Radio

Fuse Power Fuse Fuse Terminating
Resistor
W/BK B B
120
W/R A A
W/R 1 1 W/R [288B] [288A] [319B] [319A]

W/BK 2 2 W/BK
R 3 3 R W/R 1 1 W/R
R 4 4 R R 7 7 R [149B-2] [149A-2]
BK 12 12 BK R 8 8 R Amplifier
BK 13 13 BK W/BK 9 9 W/BK R 9 9 Amp Power
BK 15 15 BK BK 10 10 Ground
[162B] [162A] BK 16 16 BK W/R 11 11 CAN High
BK/GN
BK
BK 12 12 Config 1
R
R 16 16 Amp Power
GND 1 GND 2 Rear Amp BK 17 17 Ground

Fuse W/BK 18 18 CAN Low
Figure 7-26. CAN Circuit
94000390 7-25
NO VEHICLE POWER, DTC U0140 2. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in (W/R) wire.
b. No. Go to Test 4.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE
4. CAN High Circuit Short to Voltage Test
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY 1. Connect [259].
2. Connect [242A].
Table 7-4. No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140 Diagnostic Faults
3. Turn IGN ON.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal D2 and ground.
Open in CAN high circuit to the BCM
5. Is battery voltage present?
Open in CAN low circuit to the BCM
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (W/R) wire.
Open in BCM battery power circuit
Open in BCM ground circuit b. No. Go to Test 5.
Open in RHCM power circuit

5. CAN Low Circuit Continuity Test
Open in RHCM ground circuit
1. Turn IGN OFF.
CAN high short to ground
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal E2 and [22A-1]
CAN high short to voltage
terminal 4.
CAN low short to ground
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
CAN low short to voltage
a. Yes. Go to Test 6.
NOTE b. No. Repair open in (W/BK) wire.
The BCM will turn off power to the vehicle if the engine stop
switch has been ON for 15 minutes with no inputs from any of
6. CAN Low Circuit Short to Ground Test
the modules or switches.
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal E2 and ground.
1. BCM Ground Test 2. Is continuity present?
1. Turn IGN OFF. a. Yes. Repair short to ground in (W/BK) wire.
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) b. No. Go to Test 7.

and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire
harness [242B], leaving BCM [242A] disconnected. 7. CAN Low Circuit Short to Voltage Test
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) 1. Turn IGN ON.
is in position on BOB.
2. Test voltage between BOB terminal E2 and ground.
4. Disconnect BCM [259].
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test voltage between BCM [259B] terminal 1 a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (W/BK) wire.
and BOB terminal G4. b. No. Go to Test 8.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 8. RHCM Power Test
b. No. Go to Test 11. 1. Test voltage between [22D-1] terminals 1 and 2.
2. CAN High Circuit Continuity Test a. Yes. Go to Test 10.
1. Disconnect LHCM [22-1]. b. No. Go to Test 9.
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal D2 and [22D-1]
terminal 3. 9. RHCM Ground Test
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? 1. Test voltage between [22D-1] terminal 1 and ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 2. Is battery voltage present?
b. No. Repair open in (W/R) wire. a. Yes. Repair open in (BK/GN) wire.
b. No. Repair open in (R/O) wire.
3. CAN High Circuit Short to Ground Test
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal D2 and ground.
7-26 94000390
10. RHCM Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Remove main fuse [5].
3. Replace RHCM with a known good RHCM without
installing it on the vehicle.
5. Push engine stop switch to RUN.
6. Turn IGN ON.
7. Does vehicle power up?
a. Yes. Replace RHCM.
b. No. Replace BCM.
11. BCM Voltage Test

1. Test voltage between [259B] terminal 1 and ground.
a. Yes. Repair open in (BK/GN) wire.
b. No. Repair open in (R) wire.
94000390 7-27
POWER LOCK DIAGNOSTICS 7.15
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION When the system is activated the turn signals will flash. The
turn signals flash one time when the system is unlocked and
The power lock system is controlled and operated by the BCM. twice when the system is locked.
The power lock systems consist of the fork lock switch and
both saddlebag locks. There are two ways to operate the Table 7-5. Code Description
system: DTC DESCRIPTION
• Power lock buttons on the fob: A RF signal is sent out B2188 G3 output shorted low
and received by the BCM on the RF antenna. The BCM B2193 H4 output shorted low
energizes the lock or unlock relay depending on the selected
button. The relay sends voltage to lock or unlock the system. B2231 Fork locked w/VSS
• Power lock dash switches: Voltage is sent to the power B2232 Fork lock shorted high
lock resistor pack. A signal is sent to the IM, which is B2233 Fork lock shorted low
translated into a CAN signal and sent to the BCM. The BCM
B2234 Fork lock detected w/option disabled
energizes the lock or unlock relay depending on the selected
switch. The relay sends voltage to lock or unlock the system. B2235 Fork lock configuration invalid
The dash switches will only work when the ignition is on.
7-28 94000390
em02007
Fuse Block
[64B]
System Power
R/GN 4 3 V/GN
P&A From Main
R/BE 12 11 R
Fuse
P&A Relay
V/BE 24 5 87
RF Antenna BK
R/BE 17 3 30
R/Y 18 1 85
BK 23 2 86
[39A] [39B]
[213KB] [213KA]
CAN High 2 2 W/R
IM Electronic Lock Input 6 6 BK/GN
CAN Low 8 8 W/BK TN/R A A Unlock Power
TN/O B B Lock Power Fork Lock
V/BN C C Fork Lock Switch Switch
V/GN D D Power
BK/GN
[214B-2] [214A-2]
W/BK
W/R
TN/R 3 5 87
[1A] 16 3 2 BK 4 4 87A
R/BE 5 3 30 Unlock
[1B] 16 3 2
BK Relay
2 1 85
TN/GY 1 2 86
W/R
W/BK
BK/GN
TN/O 3 5 87
[105RA] [105RB] BK 4 4 87A
Lock
R/BE 5 3 30
BK 2 1 85
Relay
Unlock Output 2 2 LBE/W TN/BE 1 2 86
Dash Lock Output 3 3 LBE/Y
Switch Ground 4 4 BK
Pack P&A Relay Power 5 5 V/BE
[214B-1] [214A-1]
[200A] [200B]
Lock Input 3 3 LBE/Y

Resistor
Unlock Input 2 2 LBE/W
Pack TN/R 2 Saddlebag
Electronic lock Output 1 1 BK/GN TN/O 1 RH Lock
[213RB]
BK/GN
TN/GY
TN/BE
W/BK
R/GN
V/BN
W/R
R/Y
BK
[242B] A4 C2 D2 E2 G3 G4 H4 L3 M2
[242A] A4 C2 D2 E2 G3 G4 H4 L3 M2
BK/GN
RF Antenna
CAN High
CAN Low
Unlock Signal
Fork Lock
Ground
Lock Signal
System Power
Accessory Power
TN/R 2 Saddlebag
TN/O 1 LH Lock
GND 1
[213LB]
BK
GND 2
BCM
Figure 7-27. Power Lock Circuit
94000390 7-29
ed04060
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
33
16
32
17
18
31
30 19
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
1. Power lock resistor pack [200] 18. Left front woofer [35W]
2. Right front tweeter/midrange [34T] 19. Left front turn signal [31L]
3. Voltmeter [111] 20. Front fender tip lamp [32]
4. P&A accessory power [299] 21. Rider headset [53]
5. Radio [27] 22. Main to interconnect harness [2]
6. USB 23. LHCM [24]
7. P&A audio [280] 24. P&A accessory power [299-2]
8. IM [39] 25. Headlamp [38]
9. CB module [185] 26. RHCM [22-2]
10. Antenna [51] 27. RHCM [22-1]
11. GPS antenna [193] 28. Main to interconnect harness [1]
12. XM antenna [185] 29. TGS jumper harness [204]
13. Audio amplifier front [149-1] 30. Right front turn signal [31R]
14. Fuel gauge [117] 31. Right front woofer [34W]
15. Left front tweeter/midrange [35T] 32. Power outlet [132]
16. Left front speaker [35] 33. Right front speaker [34]
17. Rider headset [225]
Figure 7-28. Behind Fairing
Diagnostic Tips
• When testing for voltage on P&A fused power (R/GN), verify
that the battery tender is removed from a charging unit.
• When programming a power lock fob, the fob must be in
range of the vehicle.
Connector Information
(Page A-1).
7-30 94000390
ed04052
3. BCM Test
1. Connect [242A].
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal G3 and ground.
1
2 3. Is resistance less than 20 ohms?
a. Yes. Replace BCM.
4. Wiggle Test
6 3 1. Perform wiggle test.
2. Is an intermittent short present?
5 4
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in unlock circuit (TN/GY)
1. ABS [166] wire.
2. Front HO2S [137] (behind [138]) b. No. System operating properly.
3. Rear WSS [168]
4. Unlock relay [214-2]
DTC B2193
5. Lock relay [214-1]
6. Rear HO2S [138]
Figure 7-29. Behind Right Side Cover
DTC B2188 HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX Table 7-7. DTC B2193 Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Lock relay malfunction
Table 7-6. DTC B2188 Diagnostic Faults Short to ground in lock relay circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Lock Relay Circuit Short to Ground Test
Unlock relay malfunction
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Short to ground in unlock relay circuit
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
1. Unlock Relay Circuit Short to Ground Test and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire
harness [242B], leaving [242A] disconnected.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) is in position on BOB.
harness [242B], leaving [242A] disconnected. 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal H4 and
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) ground.
5. Is resistance less than 10 ohms?
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal G3 and a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
ground. b. No. Go to Test 3.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 2. Lock Relay Test
b. No. Go to Test 3. 1. Disconnect lock relay [214-1].
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal H4 and ground.
2. Unlock Relay Test 3. Is continuity present?
1. Disconnect unlock relay [214-2]. a. Yes. Repair short to ground in lock circuit (TN/BE) wire.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal G3 and ground. b. No. Replace lock relay.
3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in unlock circuit (TN/GY) 3. BCM Test
wire. 1. Connect [242A].
b. No. Replace unlock relay. 2. Test resistance between BOB terminal H4 and ground.
94000390 7-31
3. Is resistance less than 20 ohms? 3. Wiggle Test
a. Yes. Replace BCM. 1. Perform wiggle test.
b. No. Go to Test 4. 2. Check DTCs.
3. Did DTC reset?
4. Wiggle Test a. Yes. Replace fork lock.
1. Perform wiggle test.
b. No. System operating properly.
2. Is an intermittent short present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in unlock circuit (TN/BE)
DTC B2233
wire.
DTC B2231 HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY
Table 7-9. DTC B2233 Diagnostic Faults
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE POSSIBLE CAUSES
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY Fork lock switch malfunction
Short to ground fork lock switch circuit
Open fork lock switch circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open fork lock switch feed circuit 1. Fork Lock Switch Circuit Short to Ground
Fork lock switch malfunction Test
Open fork lock switch circuit 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Fork Lock Switch Feed Circuit Test and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect fork lock switch [213KB].
HD-41404), test voltage between [213KB] terminal D and
HD-41404) test continuity between BOB terminal C2 and
ground.
ground.
4. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Repair open between [213KB] terminal D and
system power fuse (V/GN) wire.
2. Fork Lock Switch Test
1. Disconnect fork lock switch [213K].
2. Fork Lock to BCM Test
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal C2 and ground.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire a. Yes. Repair short to ground in fork lock circuit (V/BN)
harness [242B], leaving BCM [242A] disconnected. wire.
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) b. No. Replace fork lock switch.
4. Test resistance between BOB terminal C2 and [213KB] 3. Fork Lock Switch Circuit Open Test
terminal C.
1. Disconnect fork lock switch [213K].
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal C2 and [213KB]
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. terminal C.
b. No. Repair open in (V/BN) wire from [242B] terminal 3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
C2 and [213KB] terminals C.
b. No. Repair open in (V/BN) wire.
7-32 94000390
4. Wiggle Test 2. Fob Battery Test
1. Perform wiggle test. 1. Test voltage on fobs batteries.
2. Is an intermittent short present? 2. Is voltage approximately 2.9V?
a. Yes. Repair short in (V/BN) wire. a. Yes. Go to Test 3.
b. No. Go to Test 5. b. No. Replace batteries.
5. DTC Test 3. Fob Programming Test

1. Clear DTC. 1. Program fobs. See the electrical diagnostic manual.
2. Cycle IGN OFF, ON, OFF. 2. Did fobs work after programming?
3. Turn IGN ON. a. Yes. System operating properly.
4. Wait 2 minutes, check DTC. b. No, both fobs inoperative. Go to Test 16.
5. Did DTC reset? c. No, one fob inoperative. Replace inoperative fob and
program.
4. Lock Test
POWER LOCKS INOPERATIVE 1. Operate power locks system with dash switches.
2. Is fork lock switch lock inoperative?
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE b. No, left saddlebag lock. Go to Test 7.
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY c. No, right saddlebag lock. Go to Test 9.
Table 7-10. Power Locks Inoperative Diagnostic Faults

5. Fork Lock Switch Unlock Resistance Test
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Power lock fob malfunction
2. Disconnect fork lock switch lock [213K].
Open in lock signal circuit
3. Remove unlock relay [214-2].
Short to ground in lock signal circuit
4. Remove lock relay [214-1].
Short to voltage in lock signal circuit
5. Test resistance between [213KB] terminal A and [214B-2]
Open in unlock signal circuit
terminal 3 (TN/R).
Short to ground in unlock signal circuit
Short to voltage in unlock signal circuit
Short to ground in power circuit
b. No. Repair open between [213KB] terminal A and
Open in power circuit [214B-2] terminal 3.
Open in lock input circuit
Open in unlock input circuit 6. Fork Lock Switch Lock Resistance Test
1. Test resistance between [213KB] terminal B and [214B-1]
NOTE terminal 3 (TN/O).
Some tests require both power lock fobs to be present.
a. Yes. Replace fork lock switch.
1. System Test
b. No. Repair open between [213KB] terminal B and
1. Operate power lock system with fobs.
[214B-1] terminal 3.
2. Operate power locks system with dash switches.
3. Do power locks function with both? 7. Left Saddlebag Unlock Resistance Test
a. Yes, all power locks work. System operating properly. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. Yes, some power locks work. Go to Test 4. 2. Disconnect left saddlebag lock [213L].
c. No, only with fob. See Power Lock Diagnostics, Power 3. Remove unlock relay [214-2].
Locks Dash Switch Inoperative (Page 7-34).
4. Remove lock relay [214-1].
d. No, only with dash switches. Go to Test 2.
5. Test resistance between [213LB] terminal 2 and [214B-2]
e. No, nothing works. Go to Test 11. terminal 3 (TN/R).
94000390 7-33
6. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Repair open between [214B-2] terminal 5 and [64B]
socket terminal 12 (R/BE).
b. No. Repair open between [213LB] terminal 2 and
13. Relay Grounds Resistance Test
1. Test resistance between [214B-2] terminals 4 and 2 and
ground.
8. Left Saddlebag Lock Resistance Test
2. Is resistance on both terminals less than 0.5 ohm?
1. Test resistance between [213LB] terminal 1 and [214B-1]
terminal 3 (TN/O). a. Yes. Go to Test 14.
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Repair open between [214B-2] terminals 4 and 2
and ground.
a. Yes. Replace left saddlebag lock.
14. Relay Lock Signal Shorted High Test
1. Install both relays.
9. Right Saddlebag Unlock Resistance Test 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
1. Turn IGN OFF.
harness [242B] and BCM [242A].
2. Disconnect right saddlebag lock [213R].
3. Remove unlock relay [214-2]. is in position on BOB.
4. Remove lock relay [214-1]. 4. Turn IGN ON.
5. Test resistance between [213RB] terminal 2 and [214B-2] 5. Test voltage between BOB terminal H4 and ground.
terminal 3 (TN/R).
6. Is voltage greater than 2.0V?
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (TN/BE) wire.
b. No. Repair open between [213RB] terminal 2 and
15. Relay Unlock Signal Shorted High Test
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal G3 and ground.
10. Right Saddlebag Lock Resistance Test
1. Test resistance between [213RB] terminal 1 and [214B-1]
terminal 3 (TN/O). a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (TN/GY) wire.
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Replace BCM.
a. Yes. Replace right saddlebag lock.
16. RF Antenna Test
[214B-1] terminal 3. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Verify fobs are present.
11. Relay Test 3. Turn IGN ON.
1. Remove lock relay.
4. Is odometer asking for PIN?
2. Remove unlock relay.
a. Yes. See the electrical diagnostic manual.
3. Perform a relay test on both relays.
b. No. Replace BCM.
4. Did both relays pass test?
POWER LOCKS DASH SWITCH
INOPERATIVE
b. No. Replace inoperative relay.
12. P&A Power Resistance Test HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
1. Turn IGN OFF. HD-42682 BREAKOUT BOX
2. Remove P&A fuse [64B]. HD-46601 BREAKOUT BOX ADAPTERS
3. Test resistance between [214B-2] terminal 5 and [64B] Table 7-11. Power Locks Dash Switch Inoperative Diagnost-
socket terminal 12 (R/BE). ic Faults
4. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? POSSIBLE CAUSES
a. Yes. Go to Test 13. Open in lock signal circuit
Short to ground in lock signal circuit
7-34 94000390
Table 7-11. Power Locks Dash Switch Inoperative Diagnost- b. No. Replace relay.
ic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES 6. P&A Relay Output Resistance Test
Short to voltage in lock signal circuit 1. Disconnect dash switch [105R].
Open in unlock signal circuit 2. Test resistance between [105RB] terminal 5 and fuse block
Short to ground in unlock signal circuit [64B] terminal 24 (V/BE).
Short to voltage in unlock signal circuit 3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
Short to ground in power circuit a. Yes. Go to Test 7.

Open in power circuit b. No. Repair open in (V/BE).
Open in lock input circuit
Open in unlock input circuit 7. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Resistance Test
Dash switch malfunction 1. Connect P&A relay [64B].
2. Disconnect resistor pack [200].
1. Verify Dash Switches Test 3. Connect BREAKOUT BOX ADAPTERS (PART NUMBER:
1. Verify dash switches. HD-46601) to [39].
2. Press lock button. 4. Attach connectors from BREAKOUT BOX (PART
NUMBER: HD-42682) to harness adapters leaving [39A]
3. Press unlock button.
disconnected.
4. Are both buttons inoperative?
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal 6 and
[200B] terminal 1 (BK/GN).
b. No, lock button inoperative. Go to Test 12.
c. No, unlock button inoperative. Go to Test 15.
2. P&A Relay Power Resistance Test b. No. Repair open in (BK/GN).
1. Remove P&A relay [64B].
2. Test voltage between [64B] socket terminal 17 and ground.
8. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Shorted Low
Test
1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
b. No. Repair open in (R/BE).
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in (BK/GN).
3. P&A Relay System Power Test
1. Turn IGN ON.
9. Electronic Lock Input Circuit Shorted High
2. Test voltage between [64B] socket terminal 18 and ground. Test
3. Is battery voltage present? 1. Connect [39A].
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. 2. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Repair open in (R/Y). 3. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
4. P&A Relay Ground Test a. Yes. Repair short to voltage on (BK/GN).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test resistance between [64B] socket terminal 23 and
ground.
10. Lock Circuit Shorted High Test
b. No. Repair open in (BK).
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage on (LBE/Y).
5. Relay Test
1. Perform a relay test.
11. Unlock Circuit Shorted High Test
2. Did relay pass test?
94000390 7-35
2. Is voltage greater than 0.5V? 18. IM Test
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage on (LBE/W). 1. Connect [200].
b. No. Go to Test 18. 2. Jumper [105RB] terminals 3 (LBE/Y) and 5 (V/BE).
3. Does system lock?
12. Power Lock Switch Unlock Test a. Yes. Replace dash switch pack.
1. Disconnect dash switch [105R].
b. No. Replace IM.
2. Jumper [105RB] terminals 2 (LBE/W) and 5 (V/BE).
3. Does system unlock?
a. Yes. Replace dash switch pack.
13. Dash Switch Unlock Circuit Shorted Low

Test
1. Disconnect resistor pack [200].
HD-41404), test continuity between [105RB] terminal 2
and ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground on (LBE/W).
14. Dash Switch Unlock Circuit Open Test

1. Test resistance between [105RB] terminal 2 and [200B]
terminal 2 (LBE/W).
a. Yes. Replace resistor pack.
b. No. Repair open in (LBE/W).
15. Power Lock Switch Lock Test

1. Disconnect dash switch [105R].
2. Jumper [105RB] terminals 3 (LBE/Y) and 5 (V/BE).
3. Does system lock?
a. Yes. Replace dash switch pack.
16. Dash Switch Lock Circuit Shorted Low Test

1. Test continuity between [105RB] terminal 3 and ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground on (LBE/Y).
17. Dash Switch Lock Circuit Open Test

1. Test resistance between [105RB] terminal 3 and [200B]
terminal 3 (LBE/Y).
a. Yes. Replace resistor pack.
b. No. Repair open in (LBE/Y).
7-36 94000390
REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS 7.16
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Table 7-12. Code Description
DTC DESCRIPTION
See Figure 7-30. The rear turn signals are controlled by the
BCM. The BCM supplies power to the rear turn signals. It B2158 Right rear turn signal output shorted low
controls the flash rate of the turn signals through the power B2159 Right rear turn signal output overloaded
circuit.
Conditions for Setting
Table 7-12. Code Description
After clearing the DTCs, operate the inoperative turn signal to
DTC DESCRIPTION
verify if the DTC has returned.
B2151 Left rear turn signal output open
• DTC B2151 or B2156 will set if the corresponding rear turn
B2153 Left rear turn signal output shorted low signal circuit draws less than 120 milliamps.
B2154 Left rear turn signal output overloaded • DTC B2154 or B2159 will set if the corresponding rear turn
B2156 Right rear turn signal output open signal circuit draws more than 3 Amps.
ed04054
1 2 3 4
5
13
6
12
11 7
10 8
1. Right STT [19] 8. Left rear woofer [42W]

2. LP lamp [45] 9. Rear audio harness [162]
3. Left STT [18] 10. Right rear woofer [41W]
4. Audio amplifier rear [149-2] 11. Right rear tweeter/midrange speaker [41T]
5. Left saddlebag [288] 12. Right saddlebag lock [213R]
6. Left saddlebag lock [213L] 13. Right saddlebag [298]
7. Left rear tweeter/midrange speaker [42T]
Figure 7-30. Rear Audio
the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS
Connector Information (Page A-1).

diagram(s) and diagnostic procedure(s), including the color of
94000390 7-37
em01970 [19B] [19A]
See Main BE 4 4 Running

Harness BE/BN 3 3 Right Turn
Right STT
[7A] [7B] BK 2 2 Ground
BE
[121A-1] [121B-1] DOM BE/R 1 1 Brake
BK 6 6 BK
1 1 BE/GN BE/V 5 5 BE/V
Rear BE/R 4 4 BE/R BK 2 2 BK Ground
Brake BE 3 3 BE BE 1 1 BK Power
LP
Switch BE/BN 2 2 BE/BN
1 1 BK
BK
[45A] [45B]
[121A-2] [121B-2] BE 4 4 Running
GND 2 BE/V 3 3 Left Turn
BK 2 2 Ground Left STT
GND 2 BE/R 1 1 Brake
[242A] [242B]
BCM [18B] [18A]
Brake Switch Input F3 F3 BE/GN
[19B] [19A]
Rear Left Turn Signal K4 K4 BE/V
Brake Light Power K3 K3 BE/R
Running/Position Light Power J3 J3 BE 4 4 Running
BE
See Main BE/BN 3 3 Right Turn
Rear Right Turn Signal K2 K2 BE/BN Right STT
Harness BK 2 2 Ground
Accessory Power M2 M2 R/Y
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[7A] [7B] [93B-2]
R/Y
BE
BK 6 6 BK BK 2 2 BK Ground
BE/V 5 5 BE/V BE 1 1 BK Power
LP BK C Ground
4 4 R/Y B Brake
BE/R BE/R
3 3 BE A Running
BE BE
BE/BN 2 2 BE/BN
[45A] [45B]
LED Tail
R/Y 1 1 R/Y Lamp
R/Y
BE
BK
Canada
BK
[94B] [94A] 4 3 2 1 [93B]

[93A]
GND 2 4 3 2 1
R/Y 1 1
2
BE 3 3 [19A] [18A]
BE/R 4 4
5 1 2 1 2
BK 6 6 1 2 3
BE 4 4 Running
BE/V 3 3 Left Turn
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[18B] [18A]
Figure 7-31. Rear Lighting

DTC B2151 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test voltage between [18B] terminal 3 and
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME ground.
HD-34730-2E FUEL INJECTOR TEST LIGHT 4. Is voltage present?
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (BE/V) wire.
HD-44687 IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST
ADAPTER
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE 2. Ground Circuit Open Test
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test continuity between [18B] terminal 2 and ground.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open in left rear turn signal ground circuit
b. No. Repair open in (BK) wire.
Open in left rear turn signal power circuit
Short to voltage in left rear turn signal power circuit
3. Power Circuit Open Test
Left STT malfunction
1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Short to Voltage Test 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
1. Disconnect left STT [18].
2. Turn IGN ON.
7-38 94000390
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in left rear turn signal power
4. Test resistance between BOB terminal K4 and [18B] circuit (BE/V) wire.
terminal 3.
b. No. Replace STT.
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. 3. High Current Test
b. No. Repair open in left rear turn signal power circuit 1. Inspect for excessive current draw from lighting.
(BE/V).
2. Was lighting responsible for excessive current draw?
a. Yes. Repair as needed.
4. Left Turn Signal Test
b. No. Replace BCM.
1. Using IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST ADAPTER (PART
NUMBER: HD-44687) connect FUEL INJECTOR TEST
LIGHT (PART NUMBER: HD-34730-2E) to BOB terminals DTC B2156
G4 and K4.
2. Turn IGN ON.
HD-34730-2E FUEL INJECTOR TEST LIGHT
3. Turn on left turn signals. HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
4. Does light flash? HD-44687 IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST
ADAPTER
a. Yes. Replace the left STT.
b. No. Replace BCM.
DTC B2153, B2154
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT POSSIBLE CAUSES
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX Open in right rear turn signal ground circuit
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE Open in right rear turn signal power circuit
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY Short to voltage in right rear turn signal power circuit
Table 7-14. DTC B2153, B2154 Diagnostic Faults Right STT malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Short to Voltage Test

Left rear turn signal current too high 1. Disconnect right STT [19].
Accessory lighting overloading circuit
2. Turn IGN ON.
Short to ground in left rear turn signal power circuit
HD-41404), test voltage between [19B] terminal 3 and
1. Left Rear Turn Power Circuit Short to Ground ground.
Test
4. Is voltage present?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage in (BE/BN) wire.
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire b. No. Go to Test 2.
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) 2. Ground Circuit Open Test
is in position on BOB. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 2. Test continuity between [19B] terminal 2 and ground.
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal K4 and
ground. 3. Is continuity present?
5. Is continuity present? a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. b. No. Repair open in (BK) wire.
2. Power Circuit Short to Ground Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Disconnect [18]. 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal K4 and ground. harness [242B], leaving [242A] disconnected.
94000390 7-39
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in right rear turn signal
4. Test resistance between BOB terminal K2 and [19B] power circuit (BE/BN) wire.
terminal 3.
b. No. Replace right STT.
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. 3. High Current Test
b. No. Repair open in right rear turn signal power circuit 1. Inspect for excessive current draw from lighting.
(BE/BN).
a. Yes. Repair as needed.
4. Right Turn Signal Test
b. No. Replace BCM.
1. Using IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST ADAPTER (PART
NUMBER: HD-44687) connect FUEL INJECTOR TEST
LIGHT (PART NUMBER: HD-34730-2E) to BOB terminals
G4 and K2.
2. Turn IGN ON.
3. Turn on right turn signals.
4. Does light flash?
a. Yes. Replace right STT.
b. No. Replace BCM.
DTC B2158, B2159

Table 7-16. DTC B2158, B2159 Diagnostic Faults

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Right rear turn signal current too high
Accessory lighting overloading circuit
Short to ground in right rear turn signal power circuit
1. Right Rear Turn Power Circuit Short to

Ground Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
ground.
2. Power Circuit Short to Ground Test

1. Disconnect [19].
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal K2 and ground.
7-40 94000390
STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS 7.17
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION When the rear stop lamp switch is closed, it grounds the circuit
from the BCM. This signals the BCM to supply power to the
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME stop lamp.
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II Some models have no center stop lamp. Instead the turn
signals are used for stop, turn and tail lamp functions. If DTCs
See Figure 7-32. The BCM controls the stop lamp based off B2161, B2163, B2164 set on a model with no center stop lamp,
inputs from the front and rear stop lamp switches. The front it means the vehicle is improperly configured. Use DIGITAL
stop lamp switch is a mechanical switch. When the front brake TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650) to configure
lever is applied, the lever presses a mechanical switch and properly.
closes the contacts on the switch. The front stop lamp switch
is part of the RHCM. When the switch is pressed, the RHCM Table 7-17. Code Description
sends a message to the BCM over the CAN bus and the BCM
DTC DESCRIPTION
supplies power to the stop lamp.
B2161 Brake lamp output open
The rear stop lamp switch is a pressure switch. When the rear
brake is applied, it generates pressure in the brake fluid. This B2163 Brake lamp output shorted low
pressure in the fluid closes the contacts for the rear stop lamp B2164 Brake lamp output overloaded
switch. The BCM supplies power to the rear stop lamp switch.
B2223 Rear brake switch shorted low (light on)
ed04054
1 2 3 4
5
13
6
12
11 7
10 8

• DTC B2161 is set when the stop lamp circuit current draw
Conditions for Setting is less than 120 milliamps.
The stop lamp circuit needs to see activation to set DTCs. • DTC B2164 is set when the stop lamp circuit current draw
Apply the front and rear brakes to verify stop lamp DTCs do is above 4 Amps.
not return.
94000390 7-41
• DTC B2223 is set when the brake switch input circuit is Connector Information
grounded for 120 seconds and the vehicle speed is above
45 mph (72 km/h). For additional information about the connectors in the following
The brake switch is normally open and supplies a path to the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS
ground when closed. DTC B2161 will only set when all loads (Page A-1).
on the circuit are inoperable.
em01970 [19B] [19A]

Right STT
BE
[121A-1] [121B-1] DOM BE/R 1 1 Brake
BK 6 6 BK
LP
1 1 BK
BK [45A] [45B]
[121A-2] [121B-2] BE 4 4 Running
[242A] [242B]
BCM [18B] [18A]
[19B] [19A]
BE
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[7A] [7B] [93B-2]
R/Y
BE
LP BK C Ground
4 4 R/Y B Brake
BE/R BE/R
3 3 BE A Running
BE BE
BE/BN 2 2 BE/BN
[45A] [45B]
LED Tail
R/Y 1 1 R/Y Lamp
R/Y
BE
BK
Canada
BK
[94B] [94A] 4 3 2 1 [93B]

[93A]
GND 2 4 3 2 1
R/Y 1 1
2
BE 3 3 [19A] [18A]
BE/R 4 4
5 1 2 1 2
BK 6 6 1 2 3
BE 4 4 Running
BE/V 3 3 Left Turn
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[18B] [18A]

STOP LAMP INOPERATIVE Table 7-18. Stop Lamp Inoperative Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Rear stop lamp switch malfunction
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX RHCM malfunction
1. Stop Lamp Switch Test
1. Turn IGN ON.
Table 7-18. Stop Lamp Inoperative Diagnostic Faults 2. Apply front brake while observing stop lamp.
POSSIBLE CAUSES 3. Apply rear brake while observing stop lamp.
Open power to switch circuit
4. Does stop lamp illuminate?
Open ground circuit
a. Yes. Stop lamp illuminates only with front brake
Open stop lamp circuit applied. Go to Test 2.
Stop lamp malfunction b. Yes. Stop lamp illuminates only with rear brake
applied. Go to Test 5.
c. No. Go to Test 6.
7-42 94000390
2. Brake Switch Test PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
1. Turn IGN OFF. HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
2. Disconnect rear stop lamp switch [121-1] and [121-2].
HD-50423 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL
HD-41404), jumper between [121B-1] and [121B-2].
4. Turn IGN ON. Table 7-19. Stop Lamp Always On, DTC B2223 Diagnostic
Faults
5. Is stop lamp on?
POSSIBLE CAUSES
a. Yes. Replace stop lamp switch.
Brake switch malfunction
Short to voltage on stop lamp output circuit
3. Brake Switch Ground Test 1. Brake Switch Test

1. Jumper between [121B-1] (BE/GN) wire and ground.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Is stop lamp on?
2. Disconnect rear brake switch [121-1] (BE/GN) wire.
a. Yes. Repair open between [121B-2] (BK) wire and
3. Turn IGN ON.
ground.
4. Does stop lamp go out?
a. Yes. Replace rear brake switch.
4. Brake Switch Input Test b. No. Go to Test 2.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Brake Switch Input Test
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire 1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wire
is in position on BOB. harness [242B], leaving [242A] disconnected.
4. Test continuity between BOB terminal F3 and rear brake 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
switch [121B-1] (BE/GN) wire. is in position on BOB.
5. Is continuity present? 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal F3 and
ground.
b. No. Repair open between [242B] terminal F3 and
[121B-1] (BE/GN) wire.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [242B] and
[121B-1] (BE/GN) wire.
5. RHCM Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect known good RHCM to vehicle.
3. Stop Lamp Power Test
3. Turn IGN ON.
1. Using 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL (PART
4. Apply front brake lever. NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal K3 from [242B]
(BE/R) wire.
2. Connect [242A].
a. Yes. Replace RHCM.
3. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Replace BCM.
4. Is stop lamp on?
6. DTC Test a. Yes. Repair short to voltage on stop lamp power circuit.
1. Check for DTCs. b. No. Go to Test 4.
2. Are DTCs present?
a. Yes. Refer to Table 7-1.
4. DTC Test
1. Remove BOB.
b. No. Replace BCM.
2. Insert terminal K3 into [242B] (BE/R) wire.
STOP LAMP ALWAYS ON, DTC B2223 3. Connect [242].
4. Clear DTCs.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 5. Operate system in the conditions for setting DTCs.
94000390 7-43
6. Check DTCs. 4. Stop Lamp Circuit Test
7. Did DTC reset? 1. With brake applied, test voltage between [94B] terminal 4
and ground.
b. No. Concern is intermittent.
a. Yes. Repair open in (BK) wire.
DTC B2161 b. No. Go to Test 5.

HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX 1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) between
wire harness [242B] and [242A].
Table 7-20. DTC B2161 Diagnostic Faults 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
POSSIBLE CAUSES is in position on BOB.
Short in stop lamp circuit 4. Connect [93] and [94].
Open ground circuit 5. Install stop lamp bulb.
Open stop lamp circuit 6. Jumper BOB terminals M2 and K3.
Stop lamp malfunction 7. Turn IGN ON.
1. Stop Lamp Bulb Test
1. Remove stop lamp bulb.
b. No. Repair open in in (BE/R) wire.
2. Inspect bulb.
3. Is bulb good?
6. Stop Lamp Circuit Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 1. Disconnect rear lighting harness [7].
b. No. Go to Test 6. 2. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
c. No. Bulb does not work. Replace bulb. HD-41404), with brake applied, test voltage between [7A]
terminals 4 and 6.
2. Stop Lamp Test 3. Is battery voltage present?
1. Turn IGN OFF. a. Yes. Go to Test 9.
2. Disconnect tail lamp [93]. b. No. Go to Test 7.
3. Turn IGN ON.
7. Stop Lamp Ground Circuit Test
HD-41404), with brake applied, test voltage between [93A] 1. With brake applied, test voltage between [7A] terminal 4
terminals 3 and 4. and ground.
5. Is battery voltage present? 2. Is battery voltage present?
a. Yes. Replace stop lamp assembly. a. Yes. Repair open in (BK) wire.
b. No. Go to Test 3. b. No. Go to Test 8.
3. Circuit Board Test 8. Power Circuit Open Test

1. Turn IGN OFF. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect [94]. 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. With brake applied, test voltage between [94B] terminals
4 and 6.
4. Test resistance between BOB K3 and [7A] terminal 4.
a. Yes. Replace circuit board.
b. No. Repair open in in (BE/R) wire.
7-44 94000390
9. Power Circuit Open Test 4. Is continuity present?
1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) a. Yes. Repair short to ground in (BE/R) wire.
3. High Current Test
1. Inspect for excessive current draw from lighting.
3. Connect [7].
4. Test resistance between BOB terminal K3 and [19B]
terminal 1. a. Yes. Repair as needed.
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Replace BCM.
b. No. Repair open (BE/R) wire.
10. Stop Lamp Signal LED Test

1. Test continuity between [7B] terminal 6 and [19B] terminal
2.
b. No. Repair open in (BK) wire.
DTC B2163, B2164

Table 7-21. DTC B2163, B2164 Diagnostic Faults

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Accessory tail lamp overloading circuit
Short to ground in stop lamp power circuit
Bulb malfunction
1. Bulb Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Inspect bulb.
3. Is bulb good?
b. No. Replace bulb.
2. Stop Lamp Power Circuit Short to Ground

Test
ground.
94000390 7-45
RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS 7.18
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ed03849
See Figure 7-34 and Figure 7-35. The running lamps consist 3
of the front position lamp (HDI), located in the headlamp
housing, the front running lamps, the license plate lamp and
1 4
the tail lamp. The running lamps are powered by the BCM
through terminal J3 and L4 (if equipped).
Table 7-22. Code Description 2 5

DTC DESCRIPTION
B2168 Running lights output shorted low
B2169 Running lights output overloaded 6
9 8 7
1. Rear audio [162]
2. Rear lighting [7]
3. Fuel tank harness [13]
4. Security antenna [209]
5. Rear amp fuse [43]
6. Purge solenoid [95]
7. ECM [78-1] (BK)
8. ECM [78-2] (GY)
9. ECM [78-3] (BN)
Figure 7-34. Under Seat
7-46 94000390
ed04054
1 2 3 4
5
13
6
12
11 7
10 8

• DTC B2169 will set if the running lights circuit is above 3
Conditions for Setting Amps.
The running lamps circuit powers up when the ignition is turned • DTC B2109 will set if the switched power output circuit is
on. On HDI models, the running lamp circuit is also powered above 10 Amps.
in the ACC position. Any running lamp related DTCs will set
shortly after the ignition is turned on. Connector Information
• DTC B2106 will set if the running lights circuit is below 120 For additional information about the connectors in the following
milliamps. diagram(s) and diagnostic procedure(s), including the color of
the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS
(Page A-1).
94000390 7-47
em01970 [19B] [19A]

Right STT
BE
[121A-1] [121B-1] DOM BE/R 1 1 Brake
BK 6 6 BK
LP
1 1 BK
BK
[45A] [45B]
[121A-2] [121B-2] BE 4 4 Running
[242A] [242B]
BCM [18B] [18A]
[19B] [19A]
BE
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[7A] [7B] [93B-2]
R/Y
BE
LP BK C Ground
4 4 R/Y B Brake
BE/R BE/R
3 3 BE A Running
BE BE
BE/BN 2 2 BE/BN
[45A] [45B]
LED Tail
R/Y 1 1 R/Y Lamp
R/Y
BE
BK
Canada
BK
[94B] [94A] 4 3 2 1 [93B]

[93A]
GND 2 4 3 2 1
R/Y 1 1
2
BE 3 3 [19A] [18A]
BE/R 4 4
5 1 2 1 2
BK 6 6 1 2 3
BE 4 4 Running
BE/V 3 3 Left Turn
BE/R 1 1 Brake
[18B] [18A]

RUNNING LAMPS INOPERATIVE 2. General Lamp Test
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 1. Inspect inoperative lamp and repair any issues.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 2. Disconnect inoperative lamp connector.
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE HD-41404), test voltage between inoperative lamp power
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY and ground terminals.
Table 7-23. Running Lamps Inoperative Diagnostic Faults
a. Yes. Replace inoperative lamp.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open lights circuit
Lamp malfunction
3. Single Lamp Power Test
Open ground circuit
1. Test voltage between inoperative lamp power terminal and
ground.
1. Running Lamp Test
1. Visually inspect all running lamps.
a. Yes. Repair open in ground circuit.
2. Do any running lamps work?
b. No. Repair open in power circuit.
b. No. Go to Test 4. 4. Running Lamp Circuit Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
7-48 94000390
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) 3. High Current Test
1. Inspect for excessive current draw from lighting.
is in position on BOB. a. Yes. Repair as needed.
4. Disconnect rear lighting [7]. b. No. Replace BCM.
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal J3 and LICENSE PLATE LAMP INOPERATIVE
[7A] terminal 3.
6. Is resistance less than 5 ohm?
b. No. Repair open in (BE) wire. Table 7-25. License Plate Lamp Inoperative (Without Center
Stop Lamp) Diagnostic Faults
DTC B2168, B2169 POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open running lamp circuit
Lamp malfunction
Open ground circuit
1. License Plate Lamp Circuit Test
1. Disconnect license plate lamp [45].
Table 7-24. DTC B2168, B2169 Diagnostic Faults 2. Turn IGN ON.
POSSIBLE CAUSES 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
Running lights circuit resistance too low HD-41404), test voltage between [45A] terminals 1 and 2.
Short to ground in running lights power circuit 4. Is voltage present?
Accessory lighting overloading circuit a. Yes. Replace license plate lamp.
1. Rear Running Lamps Circuit Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. License Plate Lamp Circuit Test
2. Disconnect rear running lamps [7].
1. Test voltage between [45A] terminal 1 and ground.
3. Clear DTC.
4. Cycle IGN OFF-ON.
a. Yes. Repair open in ground circuit.
5. Did DTC return?
b. No. Repair open in power circuit.
b. No. Repair short to ground or high current draw in the
running lamp circuit of the rear lighting harness or
components.
2. BCM Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal (J3) and
ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground in (BE) wire.
94000390 7-49
BACKLIT HAND CONTROLS INOPERATIVE 7.19
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The hand control switches are backlit and are a non-serviceable

part of the LHCM and RHCM. The back lighting on the hand
controls are always on.
BACKLIT HAND CONTROL BUTTONS

INOPERATIVE
Table 7-26. Backlit Hand Control Buttons Inoperative Dia-

gnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LHCM malfunction
RHCM malfunction
Verify proper operation of backlit hand control buttons in a dark

environment. Replace if not functioning properly.
7-50 94000390
TPMS DIAGNOSTICS 7.20
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 2. Park mode: The sensor changes from test to park mode
after detecting tire pressure of approximately 15 psi
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME (100 kPa) for 4 minutes. The sensor transmits a periodic
burst to the BCM approximately every 4 hours. A
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II replacement sensor must be in park mode to be assigned
HD-51794 TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL to the BCM using the TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL (PART
NUMBER: HD-51794) and DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of the NUMBER: HD-48650).
BCM, IM, radio information screen, and a pressure sensor in
each wheel. The BCM receives a RF signal from the sensors 3. Drive mode: The sensor changes from park to drive mode
on the RF antenna. The pressure sensor measures tire after detecting wheel acceleration for approximately 12
pressure, temperature, and wheel acceleration. seconds. The sensor transmits a periodic burst to the BCM
approximately every minute. The sensor reverts to park
NOTE mode after detecting no wheel acceleration for
The TPMS sensor will not communicate pressures above approximately 7 minutes.
50–60 psi (345–414 kPa) depending on altitude. Adjust tires
DTC C0083 will accompany all other TPMS DTCs that are set
to proper pressure before beginning diagnosis.
except DTC C0077. Address DTCs according to priority
number.
See Figure 7-37 and Figure 7-38. The BCM converts the RF
signal to a CAN signal and it is received by the radio and IM. DTC C0077 low tire pressure will result in an informational
The radio displays tire pressure on the information screen and pop-up screen displayed on the radio once per ignition cycle
the IM displays it on the odometer. for each tire that is reported low.
The pressure sensor is powered by a non-replaceable long life Table 7-27. Code Description
battery. The sensor is replaced when the battery is depleted.
DTC DESCRIPTION
The pressure sensor has three modes: C0077 Low tire pressure
1. Test mode: Prevents data transmission during shipping C0083 TPMS malfunction
and storage to maximize battery life.
C2000 Front TPMS communication fault
C2001 Rear TPMS communication fault
C2003 Front TPMS sensor fault
C2004 Rear TPMS sensor fault
C2006 TPMS IDs not loaded
C2007 Low tire pressure thresholds not loaded
94000390 7-51
ed04007
3
1 6 7
2 5
4
9
10
15 8
19
18 17 16 14 13 12 11
1. Low fuel 11. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) icon (km/h ABS icon
also shown)
2. Oil pressure 12. Auxiliary/fog
3. Security 13. Not used
4. TPMS 14. Headlamp high beam
5. Not used 15. Cruise control
6. Engine coolant temperature 16. Check engine
7. Battery discharge 17. Neutral
8. Right turn signal 18. Gear
9. Light sensor (not an indicator) 19. Left turn signal
10. Not used
Figure 7-37. Indicators
Table 7-28. DTC C0077 Diagnostic Faults
ed04008
POSSIBLE CAUSES
RF antenna
1
Low tire air pressure
2 1. Security System Test

5 1. Turn IGN OFF for 30 seconds.
3 2. Turn IGN ON.

3. Is security system working properly?
4 a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
b. No. See electrical diagnostic manual.
1. Front tire pressure

2. Sensor battery low 2. Tire Pressure Test
3. Rear tire pressure 1. Using tire pressure gauge, measure each tire and inflate
4. Low tire pressure both tires to specification. Refer to Table 2-4.
5. Front and rear tires
2. Clear DTCs.
Figure 7-38. Radio Information Screen
3. Turn IGN OFF.
Diagnostic Tips 4. Using TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL (PART NUMBER:
• Pressure sensors must be assigned to the BCM using the HD-51794), activate front and rear pressure sensors.
TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL (PART NUMBER: HD-51794) 5. Turn IGN ON.
and DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650).
6. Did DTC reset?
• The vehicle must be at rest for at least 7 minutes before
assigning replacement pressure sensors to the BCM. a. Yes. Replace affected pressure sensor.
• Both the security and TPMS indicators illuminate when a b. No. System working properly.
TPMS DTC is set.
DTCS C2000, C2001, C2003, C2004
DTC C0077
HD-51794 TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL
HD-51794 TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL
7-52 94000390
Table 7-29. DTCs C2000, C2001, C2003, C2004 Diagnostic 1. Security System Test
Faults
1. Turn IGN OFF for 30 seconds.
POSSIBLE CAUSES 2. Turn IGN ON.
RF antenna
3. Is security system working properly?
Calibration issue
Pressure sensor not assigned
b. No. See electrical diagnostic manual.
NOTE
The vehicle must be at rest for at least 7 minutes before 2. Assigning Pressure Sensors Test
assigning pressure sensor to BCM.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER:
1. Security System Test HD-48650).
1. Turn IGN OFF for 30 seconds. 3. Turn IGN ON.
2. Turn IGN ON. 4. Configure vehicle settings in DTII.
3. Is security system working properly? 5. Click on toolbox tab.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 6. Click on vehicle setup.
b. No. See electrical diagnostic manual. 7. Click on TPMS.
8. Configure tire sizes. This is important to have the correct
2. Calibration Test tire size for accurate readings.
1. Turn IGN OFF. 9. Click on update vehicle.
2. Connect DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: 10. Click on sensor assignment tab.
HD-48650).
11. Follow the sensor assignment procedure as written in DTII.
3. Turn IGN ON.
12. Road test vehicle.
4. Configure vehicle settings.
13. Did DTC reset?
5. Verify correct wheel size was selected for TPMS.
a. Yes. Replace affected pressure sensor.
6. Is proper wheel size was selected?
b. No. System working properly.
b. No. Select correct wheel size.
3. Assigning Pressure Sensors Test

1. Assign pressure sensors using TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL
(PART NUMBER: HD-51794).
2. Road test vehicle.
3. Did DTC reset?
a. Yes. Replace affected pressure sensor.
DTCS C2006, C2007

Table 7-30. DTCs C2006, C2007 Diagnostic Faults

POSSIBLE CAUSES
RF antenna
Pressure sensor not assigned
NOTE
The vehicle must be at rest for at least 7 minutes before
assigning pressure sensor to BCM.
94000390 7-53
AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS 7.21
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Battery voltage is continuously monitored by the amplifier. Any DTC DESCRIPTION
voltage readings outside of normal parameters set a DTC. B1401 AMP voltage low
Conditions for Setting B1402 AMP voltage high
• The amplifier monitors [149-1] terminal 9 and 16 for battery

power. DTC B1401 is displayed when battery voltage is less
Diagnostic Tips
than 9.0V. Any of the following conditions could cause these DTCs to set:
• The amplifier monitors [149-1] terminal 9 and 16 for battery • The charging system is malfunctioning.
power. DTC B1402 is displayed when battery voltage is
greater than 16.1V for longer than 5 seconds. • There is excessive battery draw and/or extended idling in
heavy traffic.
NOTE
• A faulty system ground is present. Low voltage generally
ECM, ABS, ECU and/or BCM may also set a battery voltage
indicates a loose wire, corroded connections, battery and/or
DTC.
a charging system problem.
Connector Information
(Page A-1).
em01971
R/PK 9 9 Amp Power

BK 10 10 Ground
Amplifier
R/PK 16 16 Amp Power
BK 17 17 Ground
R/PK
[149B] [149A]
BK
BK
[1A] 6 14 15
[1B] 6 14 15
R/PK
BK
BK
[78A-2] [78B-2] [242B] [242A]

ECM
System Power 16 16 R/GN R/GN L3 L3 System Power
BCM
R 1 1 Battery Power
[259B] [259A]
BK L3 L3 Ground
BK L4 L4 Ground
Radio
R/PK M3 M3 Radio Fuse
R/PK M4 M4 Radio Fuse
R/GN
R/PK
[27B] [27A]
R
Main System Radio

[298A] [298B] Fuse Power Fuse Fuse
R 3 3 R [149B-2] [149A-2]
R 4 4 R [288B] [288A]
BK 12 12 BK R 9 9 Amp Power
BK 13 13 BK BK 16 16 BK BK 10 10 Ground
BK 15 15 BK BK 12 12 Config 1 Amplifier
BK
R 8 8 R R 16 16 Amp Power
R 7 7 R BK 17 17 Ground
GND 2 Rear Amp
Fuse
Figure 7-39. Amplifier Power Circuit
7-54 94000390
DTC B1401 6. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop 16 Test
1. Perform voltage drop test between BOB terminal 16 and
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME fuse block [64B] socket terminal 6.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 2. Is voltage drop greater than 0.5V?
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX a. Yes. Go to Test 7.
b. No. Problem may be intermittent. Go to Test 8.
POSSIBLE CAUSES 7. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop Test
Amplifier power circuit 1. Perform voltage drop test between fuse block [64B] socket
Open in battery power circuit terminal 6 and main fuse [5B] terminal B.
2. Is voltage drop greater than 0.5V?
1. Battery Test
a. Yes. Repair or replace (R) wire between [64B] socket
1. Perform battery test. See battery testing in electrical terminal 5 and [5B] terminal B.
diagnostic manual.
b. No. Repair or replace (R/BK) or (R/PK) wire between
2. Did battery pass test? [149] terminals 9 and 16 and [64B] socket terminal 6.
b. No. Replace battery. 8. Amplifier DTC Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Charging System Test 2. Clear DTCs.
1. Perform charging system test. See charging system in 3. Start vehicle.
electrical diagnostic manual.
4. Run at 3000 rpm for 5 seconds.
2. Is charging system working properly?
5. Check DTCs.
6. Did DTC reset?
b. No. Repair charging system.
a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
3. Amplifier Battery Voltage 9 Test b. No. System working properly.
1. Turn IGN OFF. DTC B1402

2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1] Table 7-33. DTC B1402 Diagnostic Faults
and amplifier [149A-1].
POSSIBLE CAUSES
3. Turn IGN ON.
Charging system malfunction
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 9 and
1. Charging System Test
ground.
1. Perform charging system tests. See charging system in
5. Is voltage less than 9V?
electrical diagnostic manual.
a. Yes. Go to Test 5. 2. Is charging system good?
b. No. Repair charging system.
4. Amplifier Battery Voltage 16 Test
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 16 and ground.
2. Repair Validation Test
2. Is voltage less than 9V?
1. Clear DTCs.
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. 2. Start vehicle.
b. No. Go to Test 8. 3. Run at 3000 rpm for 5 seconds.
4. Check DTCs.
5. Amplifier Battery Voltage Drop 9 Test
5. Did DTC reset?
1. Perform voltage drop test between BOB terminal 9 and
fuse block [64B] socket terminal 6. a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
2. Is voltage drop greater than 0.5V? b. No. System working properly.
b. No. Problem may be intermittent. Go to Test 8.
94000390 7-55
RADIO DIAGNOSTICS 7.22
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION DTC B1337
The radio and amplifiers continuously monitor the status of the PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
front and rear speaker circuits. HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
DTC DESCRIPTION
B1337 Front left speaker shorted together
B1339 Front left speaker shorted low Table 7-35. DTC B1337 Diagnostic Faults
B1340 Front left speaker shorted high POSSIBLE CAUSES
B1341 Rear left speaker shorted together Shorted circuit wires
B1343 Rear left speaker shorted low Reset needed
B1344 Rear left speaker shorted high

1. Circuit Shorted Test
B1345 Front right speaker shorted together
1. Turn IGN OFF.
B1347 Front right speaker shorted low
B1348 Front right speaker shorted high and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
B1349 Rear right speaker shorted together harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected.
B1351 Rear right speaker shorted low 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
B1352 Rear right speaker shorted high
Connector Information HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminals L1
and L2.
diagram(s) and diagnostic procedure(s), including the color of 5. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms?
the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
(Page A-1).
em01663
2. Amplifier Test
Radio
1. Disconnect amplifier [149-1].
RT Front Out (+)
LT Front Out (+)

RT Front Out (-)
LT Front Out (-)
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals L1 and L2.

M1 M2 L2 L1 [27A]
M1 M2 L2 L1 [27B] b. No. Replace amplifier.
3. [2A] Test
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
1. Disconnect fairing [2].

9 10 11 12 [2B] 2. Test continuity between BOB terminals L1 and L2.
9 10 11 12 [2A]
a. Yes. Repair short between [27B] terminals L1 and L2
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
and [2B] terminals 12 and 11.

b. No. Repair short between [2A] terminals 11 and 12 and
22 23 21 20 [149B-1]
[149B-1] terminals 21 and 20.
22 23 21 20 [149A-1]
RT In (+)
RT In (-)
LT In (+)
LT In (-)
4. Reset Test
1. Connect all connectors.
2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
Amplifier and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
3. Turn IGN OFF and ON.
4. Turn volume up to 75 percent. Allow radio to play for 30
Figure 7-40. Radio and Amplifier 1 Circuit seconds.
7-56 94000390
5. Turn IGN OFF. 2. Is continuity present?
6. Check DTCs. a. Yes. Go to Test 5.
7. Did DTC reset? b. No. Replace amplifier.
a. Yes. Replace radio.
5. [2B] Terminal 11 Test
DTC B1339 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal L2 and ground.
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 3. Is continuity present?

HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal L2
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX and [2B] terminal 11 (PK/O).
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE b. No. Repair short to ground between [2A] terminal 11
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY and [149B-1] terminal 21 (PK/O).
Table 7-36. DTC B1339 Diagnostic Faults 6. Reset Test

POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Connect [27A].
Shorted circuit wires 2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
Reset needed and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
1. (PK/GY) Circuit Grounded Test
4. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Allow radio to play for 30 seconds.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
5. Turn IGN OFF.
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring 6. Check DTCs.
harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected. 7. Did DTC reset?
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) a. Yes. Replace radio.
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal L1 and DTC B1340
ground.
5. Is continuity present? PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
2. Amplifier Terminal 20 Test
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal L1 and ground. Table 7-37. DTC B1340 Diagnostic Faults
3. Is continuity present? POSSIBLE CAUSES

Shorted circuit wires
Reset needed
1. (PK/GY) Circuit Voltage Test

1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal L1 and ground. and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
3. Is continuity present? harness [27B] and radio [27A].
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal L1 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
and [2B] terminal 12 (PK/GY). is in position on BOB.
b. No. Repair short to ground between [2A] terminal 12 4. Turn IGN ON.
and [149B-1] terminal 20 (PK/GY). 5. Turn radio ON.
4. (PK/O) Circuit Grounded Test HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal L1 and
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals L2 and ground. ground.
94000390 7-57
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 5. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. a. Yes. Go to Test 7.
b. No. Go to Test 8. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2A] terminal 11
and [149B-1] terminal 21 (PK/O).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
7. [27A] Terminal L2 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect [27B].
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal L1 and ground.
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal L2 from [27B]
5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? (PK/O).
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 4. Connect [27B].
b. No. Go to Test 5. 5. Turn IGN ON.
3. [2B] Terminal 12 Test 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2B] terminal 11
3. Turn IGN ON. and [27B] terminal L2 (PK/O).
8. Reset Test
and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2A] terminal 12
and [149B-1] terminal 20 (PK/GY).
4. [27A] Terminal L1 Voltage Test 4. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Turn IGN OFF. 5. Check DTCs.
2. Disconnect [27B]. 6. Did DTC reset?
3. Using 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL (PART a. Yes. Replace radio.
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal L1 from [27B]
(PK/GY).
4. Connect [27B]. DTC B1345
5. Turn IGN ON.
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
a. Yes. Replace radio. HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2B] terminal 12 HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY
and [27B] terminal L1 (PK/GY).
5. (PK/O) Circuit Voltage Test POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal L2 and ground. Shorted circuit wires
Reset needed
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. 1. Circuit Shorted Test
b. No. Replace amplifier. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
6. [2B] Terminal 12 Test and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
1. Turn IGN OFF. harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected.
2. Disconnect fairing [2]. 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)

3. Turn IGN ON.
7-58 94000390
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminals M1 and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
and M2. harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected.
5. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms? 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal M1 and
ground.
2. Amplifier Test 5. Is continuity present?
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals M1 and M2.
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 2. Amplifier Terminal 22 Test
b. No. Replace amplifier. 1. Disconnect amplifier [149-1].
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals M1 and ground.
3. [2A] Test 3. Is continuity present?
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals M1 and M2.
a. Yes. Repair short between [27B] terminals M1 and M2 3. [2B] Terminal 9 Test
and [2B] terminals 9 and 10.
b. No. Repair short between [2A] terminals 9 and 10 and
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal M1 and ground.
[149B-1] terminals 22 and 23.
4. Reset Test a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal M1
and [2B] terminal 9 (PK).
1. Connect all connectors.
b. No. Repair short to ground between [2A] terminal 9 and
[149B-1] terminal 22 (PK).
4. (PK/BK) Circuit Grounded Test
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals M2 and ground.
seconds.
5. Turn IGN OFF.
6. Check DTCs.
b. No. Replace amplifier.
7. Did DTC reset?
DTC B1347 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal M2 and ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal M2
and [2B] terminal 10 (PK/BK).
b. No. Repair short to ground between [2A] terminal 10
and [149B-1] terminal 23 (PK/BK).
Table 7-39. DTC B1347 Diagnostic Faults 6. Reset Test

POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Connect [27A].
Shorted circuit wires 2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
Reset needed
1. (PK) Circuit Grounded Test 4. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Allow radio to play for 30 seconds.
94000390 7-59
6. Check DTCs. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2A] terminal 9 and
[149B-1] terminal 22 (PK).
7. Did DTC reset?
4. [27A] Terminal M1 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
DTC B1348 2. Disconnect [27B].
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal M1 from [27B]
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PK).
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX 4. Connect [27B].
5. Turn IGN ON.
6. Test voltage between BOB terminal M1 and ground.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2B] terminal 9 and
Shorted circuit wires [27B] terminal M1 (PK).
Reset needed
5. (PK/BK) Circuit Voltage Test
1. (PK) Circuit Voltage Test 1. Test voltage between BOB terminal M2 and ground.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
harness [27B] and radio [27A]. b. No. Replace amplifier.
is in position on BOB. 6. [2B] Terminal 10 Test
4. Turn IGN ON. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
5. Turn radio ON. 2. Disconnect fairing [2].
6. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 3. Turn IGN ON.
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal M1 and
ground.
b. No. Repair short to power between [2A] terminal 10

7. [27A] Terminal M2 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal M1 and ground. NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal M2 from [27B]
(PK/BK).
4. Connect [27B].
5. Turn IGN ON.
3. [2B] Terminal 9 Test 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Turn IGN OFF. a. Yes. Replace radio.
2. Disconnect fairing [2]. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [2B] terminal 10
and [27B] terminal M2 (PK/BK).
3. Turn IGN ON.
8. Reset Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
7-60 94000390
2. Turn IGN OFF and ON. 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
4. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminals H1
5. Check DTCs. and J1.
6. Did DTC reset? 5. Is resistance less than 2 ohms?
a. Yes. Replace radio. a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
b. No. System working properly. b. No. Go to Test 5.
em01975 Radio 2. Amplifier Test

RT Rear Spkr +
LT Rear Spkr +
RT Rear Spkr -
LT Rear Spkr -
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals H1 and J1.

H1 J1 K1 K2 [27A] a. Yes. Go to Test 3.
H1 J1 K1 K2 [27B]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
3. [288] Test
2 1 3 4 [162A] 1. Disconnect left saddlebag [288].
2 1 3 4 [162B]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
12 3 4 13 [288B]
b. No. Repair short between [288A] terminals 12 and 3
12 3 4 13 [288A]
and [149B-2] terminals 20 and 21.
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
4. [162] Test
20 21 22 23 [149B-2] 1. Disconnect rear audio [162].
20 21 22 23 [149A-2]
RT IN +
RT IN -
LT IN -
LT IN +
a. Yes. Repair short between [27B] terminals H1 and J1
and [162A] terminals 2 and 1.
Amplifier
b. No. Repair short between [162B] terminals 2 and 1 and
Figure 7-41. Radio and Amplifier 2 Circuit [288B] terminals 12 and 3.
DTC B1341
5. Reset Test
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 1. Connect all connectors.
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
Table 7-41. DTC B1341 Diagnostic Faults seconds.
POSSIBLE CAUSES 5. Turn IGN OFF.
Shorted circuit wires 6. Check DTCs.

Reset needed 7. Did DTC reset?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) DTC B1343
harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
94000390 7-61
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 2. Is continuity present?
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX a. Yes. Go to Test 6.
Table 7-42. DTC B1343 Diagnostic Faults 6. [288] Terminal 3 Test

POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Disconnect left saddlebag [288].
Shorted circuit wires 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal J1 and ground.
Reset needed 3. Is continuity present?
1. (LBE/GY) Circuit Grounded Test
1. Turn IGN OFF. and [149B-2] terminal 21 (LBE/O).
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring 7. [162] Terminal 1 Test
harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected.
1. Disconnect rear audio [162].
is in position on BOB. 2. Test continuity between BOB terminals J1 and ground.
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 3. Is continuity present?

HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminals H1 a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal J1
and ground. and [162A] terminal 1 (LBE/O).
5. Is continuity present? b. No. Repair short to ground between [162B] terminal 1
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. and [288B] terminal 3 (LBE/O).
8. Reset Test
2. Amplifier Test 1. Connect [27A].
1. Disconnect amplifier [149-2]. 2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications

2. Test continuity between BOB terminals H1 and ground.
5. Turn IGN OFF.
6. Check DTCs.
3. [288] Terminal 12 Test 7. Did DTC reset?
1. Disconnect left saddlebag [288]. a. Yes. Replace radio.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals H1 and ground. b. No. System working properly.
3. Is continuity present? DTC B1344

b. No. Repair short to ground between [288A] terminal 12 PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
and [149B-2] terminal 20 (LBE/GY). HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
4. [162] Terminal 2 Test HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals H1 and ground.
3. Is continuity present? Table 7-43. DTC B1344 Diagnostic Faults
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal H1 POSSIBLE CAUSES

and [162A] terminal 2 (LBE/GY). Shorted circuit wires
b. No. Repair short to ground between [162B] terminal 7 Reset needed
and [288B] terminal 12 (LBE/GY).
1. (LBE/GY) Circuit Voltage Test
5. (LBE/O) Circuit Grounded Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals J1 and ground.
7-62 94000390
2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) 4. Connect [27B].
5. Turn IGN ON.
harness [27B] and radio [27A].
6. Test voltage between BOB terminal H1 and ground.
is in position on BOB. 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
4. Turn IGN ON. a. Yes. Replace radio.
5. Turn radio ON. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [27B] terminal H1
and [162A] terminal 2 (LBE/GY).
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal H1 and
ground. 6. (LBE/O) Circuit Voltage Test
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 1. Test voltage between BOB terminal J1 and ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 2. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
b. No. Go to Test 10. a. Yes. Go to Test 7.
2. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF. 7. [288] Terminal 3 Test
2. Disconnect amplifier [149-2]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON. 2. Disconnect left saddlebag [288].
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal H1 and ground. 3. Turn IGN ON.
5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 4. Test voltage between BOB terminal J1 and ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 5. Is continuity present?
b. No. Go to Test 6. a. Yes. Go to Test 8.
3. [288] Terminal 12 Test and [149B-2] terminal 21 (LBE/O).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect left saddlebag [288].
8. [162] Terminal 1 Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal J1 and ground.
and [149B-2] terminal 20 (LBE/GY). a. Yes. Go to Test 9.
4. [162] Terminal 2 Test and [288B] terminal 3 (LBE/O).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
9. [27] Terminal J1 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal J1 from [27B]
a. Yes. Go to Test 5. (LBE/O).
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [162B] terminal 2 4. Connect [27B].
and [288B] terminal 12 (LBE/GY).
5. Turn IGN ON.
6. Test voltage between BOB terminal J1 and ground.
5. [27] Terminal H1 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [27B] terminal J1
and [162A] terminal 1 (LBE/O).
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal H1 from [27B]
(LBE/GY).
94000390 7-63
10. Reset Test b. No. Repair short between [288A] terminals 4 and 13
4. [162] Test
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and K2.
4. Turn IGN OFF.
5. Check DTCs.
a. Yes. Repair short between [27B] terminals K1 and K2
6. Did DTC reset?
and [162A] terminals 3 and 4.
b. No. Repair short between [162B] terminals 3 and 4 and
b. No. System working properly. [288B] terminals 4 and 13.
DTC B1349 5. Reset Test

PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 1. Connect all connectors.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX and service functions in the electrical diagnostic manual.
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE 3. Turn IGN OFF and ON.
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY 4. Turn volume up to 75 percent. Allow radio to play for 30
seconds.
5. Turn IGN OFF.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
6. Check DTCs.
Shorted circuit wires
7. Did DTC reset?
Reset needed
1. Circuit Shorted Test b. No. System working properly.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
DTC B1351
harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminals K1
and K2.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. Shorted circuit wires
b. No. Go to Test 5. Reset needed
2. Amplifier Test 1. (LBE) Circuit Shorted Test

1. Disconnect amplifier [149-2]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and K2. 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
b. No. Replace amplifier. is in position on BOB.
3. [288] Test HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and
ground.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and K2.
7-64 94000390
2. Amplifier Test 2. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and ground.
5. Turn IGN OFF.
6. Check DTCs.
7. Did DTC reset?
3. [288] Terminal 4 Test a. Yes. Replace radio.
1. Disconnect left saddlebag [288]. b. No. System working properly.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and ground.
DTC B1352
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
and [149B-2] terminal 22 (LBE). HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
4. [162] Terminal 3 Test HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and ground. Table 7-46. DTC B1352 Diagnostic Faults
3. Is continuity present? POSSIBLE CAUSES
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal K1 Shorted circuit wires
and [162A] terminal 3 (LBE). Reset needed
b. No. Repair short to ground between [162B] terminal 11
and [288B] terminal 4 (LBE). 1. (LBE) Circuit Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
5. (LBE/BK) Circuit Grounded Test 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals K2 and ground. and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring
harness [27B] and radio [27A].
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. is in position on BOB.
b. No. Replace amplifier. 4. Turn IGN ON.
5. Turn radio ON.
1. Disconnect left saddlebag [288]. HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminals K1 and
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal K2 and ground. ground.
3. Is continuity present? 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
b. No. Repair short to ground between [288A] terminal 13 b. No. Go to Test 10.
and [149B-2] terminal 23 (LBE/BK).
2. Amplifier Test
7. [162] Terminal 4 Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Disconnect rear audio [162]. 2. Disconnect amplifier [149-2].
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal K2 and ground. 3. Turn IGN ON.
3. Is continuity present? 4. Test voltage between BOB terminals K1 and ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [27B] terminal K2 5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
and [162A] terminal 4 (LBE/BK).
b. No. Repair short to ground between [162B] terminal 4
and [288B] terminal 13 (LBE/BK). b. No. Go to Test 6.
8. Reset Test 3. [288] Terminal 4 Test

1. Connect [27A]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
94000390 7-65
2. Disconnect left saddlebag [288]. 8. [162] Terminal 4 Test
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal K1 and ground. 2. Disconnect rear audio [162].
5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 3. Turn IGN ON.
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. 4. Test voltage between BOB terminal K2 and ground.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [288A] terminal 4 5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
and [149B-2] terminal 22 (LBE).
b. No. Repair short to power between [162B] terminal 4
4. [162] Terminal 3 Test and [288B] terminal 13 (LBE/BK).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect rear audio [162]. 9. [27] Terminal K2 Voltage Test
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal K1 and ground. 2. Disconnect [27B].
5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 3. Using 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL (PART
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal K2 from [27B]
(LBE/BK).
4. Connect [27B].
and [288B] terminal 4 (LBE).
5. Turn IGN ON.
5. [27] Terminal K1 Voltage Test 6. Test voltage between BOB terminal K2 and ground.
1. Turn IGN OFF. 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
2. Disconnect [27B]. a. Yes. Replace radio.
3. Using 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL (PART b. No. Repair short to voltage between [27B] terminal K2
NUMBER: HD-50423), remove terminal K1 from [27B] and [162A] terminal 4 (LBE/BK).
(LBE).
4. Connect [27B]. 10. Reset Test
5. Turn IGN ON. 1. Perform a pre-calibration reset. See audio specifications
6. Test voltage between BOB terminal K1 and ground.
4. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [27B] terminal K1
and [162A] terminal 3 (LBE). 5. Check DTCs.
6. Did DTC reset?
6. (LBE/BK) Circuit Voltage Test a. Yes. Replace radio.

1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Repair short to power between [288A] terminal 3
and [149B-2] terminal 23 (LBE/BK).
7-66 94000390
AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1 7.23
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION • If radio is beeping with IGN ON and radio ON, use DIGITAL
TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650) to set regional
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME code.
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II • If B1404 and or B1405 is set, the amplifier needs to be
reflashed using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER:
The amplifier monitors the status of all its speaker circuits. HD-48650).
Many faults may occur that do not set a DTC. These faults are Connector Information
listed in Table 7-48. Verify no DTCs are present before
addressing symptoms. For additional information about the connectors in the following
Table 7-47. Code Description the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS
(Page A-1).
DTC DESCRIPTION
B1403 Speaker output DC offset em01804
Amplifier
RT Tweeter/Mid +
LT Tweeter/Mid +
RT Tweeter/Mid -
LT Tweeter/Mid -
B1404 Internal thermal shutdown error
RT Woofer +
LT Woofer +
RT Woofer -
LT Woofer -
B1405 EQ correlation error
B1406 Invalid or missing EQ
B1410 Channel 1 speaker open [149A-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
[149B-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
B1411 Channel 1 speaker shorted low
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
PK/O
PK/GY
BN/R
PK/BK
PK
B1412 Channel 1 speaker shorted high
B1413 Channel 1 speaker shorted together
B1420 Channel 2 speaker open
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
A B [35TB] [34TB] A B
A B [35TA] [34TA] A B
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
BN/R
B1431 Channel 3 speaker shorted low [35B-1] 2 1 1 2 [34B-1]
[35A-1] 2 1 1 2 [34A-1]
PK/BK
PK/BK
PK
PK
Left Front Right Front
B1441 Channel 4 speaker shorted low Tweeter/Mid Tweeter/Mid
PK/BK
PK/BK
Table 7-48. Symptoms Description
PK
PK
DESCRIPTION [35B-2] 2 1 1 2 [34B-2]

All speakers inoperative [35A-2] [34A-2]
Left front speaker low or no audio
Both left speakers low or no audio
Left rear speaker low or no audio Left Front Right Front
Woofer Woofer
Right front fairing speaker low or no audio
Both right speakers low or no audio Figure 7-42. Amplifier 1: Front Speakers
Right rear speaker low or no audio DTC B1403, B1404
Diagnostic Tips Table 7-49. DTC B1403, B1404 Diagnostic Faults

• Use DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650) POSSIBLE CAUSES
to retrieve amplifier DTCs.
Reset needed
• Before testing amplifier, remove amplifier fuse for 1 minute,
install amplifier fuse and verify issue is still present. 1. Fuse Test
• Check for radio software updates. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
94000390 7-67
2. Remove amplifier fuse. b. No. Repair open between [35A-1] terminal 1 and [35B-2]
terminal 1 (PK).
3. After waiting one minute, install amplifier fuse.
4. Turn IGN ON.
4. [35-2] Terminal 2 Test
5. Clear DTCs.
1. Test resistance between [35A-1] terminal 2 and [35B-2]
6. Turn radio ON. terminal 2 (PK/BK).
7. Adjust volume to 8 bars. Allow radio to play for 30 seconds. 2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
8. Check DTCs. a. Yes. Go to Test 5.
9. Did DTC reset? b. No. Repair open between [35A-1] terminal 2 and [35B-2]
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
5. Speaker Test
DTC B1410 1. Test resistance between [35A-2] speaker terminals 1 and
2.
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 2. Is resistance approximately 2 Ohms?
BREAKOUT BOX b. No. Replace speaker.
Table 7-50. DTC B1410 Diagnostic Faults DTC B1411

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker
Open wiring circuit HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
1. Channel 1 [149-1] Terminal 5 Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) between wiring harness Short to ground in speaker wires
[149B-1] and amplifier [149A-1].
3. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1]. 1. Channel 1 [149-1] Terminal 5 Circuit Test
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal 5 and 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
[35B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GY). (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:

HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal 5 and
b. No. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 5 and ground.
[35B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GY).
2. [149-1] Terminal 6 Test a. Yes. Go to Test 3.
1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 6 and [35B-1] b. No. Go to Test 2.

terminal 1 (BN/O).
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? 2. [149-1] Terminal 6 Circuit Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
b. No. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 6 and 2. Is continuity present?

[35B-1] terminal 1 (BN/O). a. Yes. Go to Test 4.
1. Disconnect speaker [35-2]. 3. [35-1] Terminal 2 Test
2. Test resistance between [35A-1] terminal 1 and [35B-2] 1. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1].
terminal 1 (PK).
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 5 and ground.
7-68 94000390
3. Is continuity present? 5. Is battery voltage present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal a. Yes. Repair short to voltage between [149B-1] terminal
5 and [35B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GY). 5 and [35B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GY).
b. No. Repair short to ground between [35A-1] terminal 2 b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35A-1] terminal
and [35B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BK). 2 and [35B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BK).
4. [35-1] Terminal 1 Test 4. [35-1] Terminal 1 Test

1. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 6 and ground. 2. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1].
3. Is continuity present? 3. Turn IGN ON.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal 4. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
6 and [35B-1] terminal 1 (BN/O).
b. No. Repair short to ground between [35A-1] terminal 1
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage between [149B-1] terminal
and [35B-2] terminal 1 (PK).
DTC B1412 b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35A-1] terminal
1 and [35B-2] terminal 1 (PK).
DTC B1413
BREAKOUT BOX
Table 7-52. DTC B1412 Diagnostic Faults HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short to voltage in speaker wires Table 7-53. DTC B1413 Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Channel 1 Terminal 5 Voltage Test
Short in speaker wires
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 1. Channel 1 [35-1] Test
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1]
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
4. Turn radio ON. leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 3. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1].
ground.
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals 5 and
6. Is battery voltage present? 6.
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. 5. Is continuity present?
b. No. Go to Test 2. a. Yes. Repair short between [149B-1] terminals 5 and 6
2. Terminal 6 Voltage Test b. No. Go to Test 2.
2. [35-2] Test
1. Disconnect speaker [35-2].
2. Test continuity between [35A-1] terminals 1 and 2.
3. [35-1] Terminal 2 Test a. Yes. Repair short between [35A-1] terminals 1 and 2
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect interconnect speaker [35-1].
3. Turn IGN ON.
3. Speaker Test
1. Test resistance between [35A-2] speaker terminals 1 and
2.
94000390 7-69
2. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms? b. No. Repair open between [34A-1] terminal 2 and [34B-2]
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
a. Yes. Replace speaker.
5. Speaker Test
DTC B1420 1. Test resistance between [34A-2] speaker terminals 1 and
2.
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 2. Is resistance approximately 2 Ohms?
BREAKOUT BOX b. No. Replace speaker.

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
Open wiring circuit HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1] Short to ground in speaker wires
3. Disconnect interconnect speaker [34-1]. 1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Test
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal 7 and 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
[34B-1] terminal 1 (BN/R). (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
b. No. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 7 and ground.
[34B-1] terminal 1 (BN/R).
1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 8 and [34B-1]
terminal 2 (BN/GN).
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? 2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Test
b. No. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 8 and
[34B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GN). a. Yes. Go to Test 4.
1. Disconnect speaker [34-2]. 3. [34-1] Terminal 1 Test
2. Test resistance between [34A-1] terminal 1 and [34B-2] 1. Disconnect interconnect speaker [34-1].
terminal 1 (PK).
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal
b. No. Repair open between [34A-1] terminal 1 and [34B-2] 7 and [34B-1] terminal 1 (BN/R).
terminal 1 (PK).
1. Test resistance between [34A-1] terminal 2 and [34B-2] 4. [34-1] Terminal 2 Test
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 8 and ground.
7-70 94000390
3. Is continuity present? 4. Test voltage between BOB terminal 8 and ground.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal 5. Is battery voltage present?
8 and [34B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GN).
b. No. Repair short to ground between [34A-1] terminal 2 8 and [34B-1] terminal 2 (BN/GN).
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34A-1] terminal
DTC B1422
DTC B1423
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
BREAKOUT BOX
BREAKOUT BOX
POSSIBLE CAUSES Table 7-57. DTC B1423 Diagnostic Faults
Short to voltage in speaker wires POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short in speaker wires
1. Channel 2 [149-1] Terminal 7 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF. 1. Channel 1 [149-1] Test
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 1. Turn IGN OFF.
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) between wiring harness
3. Turn IGN ON. leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
4. Turn radio ON. 3. Disconnect interconnect speaker [34-1].
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and
ground. 8.
6. Is battery voltage present? 5. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. a. Yes. Repair short between [149B-1] terminals 7 and 8
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Voltage Test
2. [34-2] Test
2. Test continuity between [34A-1] terminals 1 and 2.
a. Yes. Repair short between [34A-1] terminals 1 and 2
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Speaker Test
3. Turn IGN ON.
1. Test resistance between [34A-2] speaker terminals 1 and
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and ground. 2.
5. Is battery voltage present? 2. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms?
a. Yes. Repair short to voltage between [149B-1] terminal a. Yes. Replace speaker.
7 and [34B-1] terminal 1 (BN/R).

1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Turn IGN ON.
94000390 7-71
Amplifier 5. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
em01804
RT Tweeter/Mid +
LT Tweeter/Mid +
RT Tweeter/Mid -
LT Tweeter/Mid -
RT Woofer +
LT Woofer +
RT Woofer -
LT Woofer -
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 1 and [35TB]
terminal A (PK/O).
[149A-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
[149B-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4 2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open

Test
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
PK/O
PK/GY
BN/R
PK/BK
PK
1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 2 and [35TB]
terminal 2 (PK/GY).
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
A B [35TB] [34TB] A B
A B [35TA] [34TA] A B
[35TB] terminal B (PK/GY).
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
BN/R
[35B-1] 2 1 1 2 [34B-1] 3. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test

[35A-1] 2 1 1 2 [34A-1] 1. Test continuity between [35TA] terminal A and B.
PK/BK
PK/BK
PK
PK
Left Front Right Front b. No. Replace speaker.
Tweeter/Mid Tweeter/Mid
DTC B1431

PK/BK
PK/BK

PK
PK
[35B-2] 2 1 1 2 [34B-2] HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM

[35A-2] [34A-2] BREAKOUT BOX

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Left Front Right Front Short to ground in speaker wires
Woofer Woofer
Figure 7-43. Amplifier 1: Front Speakers 1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker

DTC B1430 Grounded Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
BREAKOUT BOX
ground.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149-1] terminal
Open wiring circuit 1 and tweeter/mid speaker [35TB] terminal A.
1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Open Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Grounded Test
3. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [35T].
2 and tweeter/mid speaker [35TB] terminal B.
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal 1 and
[35TB] terminal 1 (PK/O). b. No. Replace amplifier.
7-72 94000390
DTC B1432 4. Turn IGN ON.
B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM b. No. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal
BREAKOUT BOX 2 and [35TB] terminal B (PK/GY).

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short to voltage in speaker wires
1. [149-1] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
Voltage Test BREAKOUT BOX
1. Turn IGN OFF. Table 7-61. DTC B1433 Diagnostic Faults

2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX POSSIBLE CAUSES
Shorted speaker wires
3. Turn IGN ON. 1. [149-1] Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test
4. Turn radio ON. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 1 and (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
ground. leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
6. Is battery voltage present? 3. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [35T].
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
b. No. Go to Test 3. HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals 1 and
2.
2. [149-1] Terminal 1 Voltage Test 5. Is continuity present?
1. Turn IGN OFF. a. Yes. Repair short between[149-1] terminals 1 and 2

and [35TB] terminals A and B.
2. Disconnect [149B-1].
3. Using TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (PART NUMBER:
B-50085), remove terminal 1 from [149B-1] (LBE/O).
2. Left Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test
4. Turn IGN ON.
1. Test resistance between [35TA] terminals 1 and 2.
2. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms?
b. No. Repair short to ground between [149B-1] terminal
1 and [35TB] terminal A (PK/O). DTC B1440
3. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
Voltage Test HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 2 and ground. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
2. Is battery voltage present? BREAKOUT BOX
a. Yes. Go to Test 4. Table 7-62. DTC B1440 Diagnostic Faults

b. No. Replace amplifier. POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker
4. [149-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test Open wiring circuit
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect [149B-1]. 1. [149-1] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open
Test
B-50085), remove terminal 2 from [149B-1] (LBE/GY). 1. Turn IGN OFF.
94000390 7-73
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 2. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1] Grounded Test
4 and [34TB] terminal B (PK/BK).
[34TB] terminal A (PK).
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. DTC B1442
terminal A (PK). PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
2. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
Test HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
POSSIBLE CAUSES
terminal B (PK/BK). 1. [149-1] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
Voltage Test
3. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Test resistance between [34TA] terminals A and B. 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1]
3. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Replace speaker.
4. Turn radio ON.
DTC B1441 5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME ground.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 6. Is battery voltage present?
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM a. Yes. Go to Test 2.
BREAKOUT BOX
POSSIBLE CAUSES 2. [149-1] Terminal 3 Voltage Test
Short to ground in speaker wires 1. Turn IGN OFF.
Grounded Test 3. Using TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (PART NUMBER:
B-50085), remove terminal 3 from [149B-1] (PK).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn IGN ON.
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1], 5. Test voltage between BOB terminal 3 and ground.
leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected. 6. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
ground. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149B-1] terminal
3 and [34TB] terminal A (PK).
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149-1] terminal 3. [149-1] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
3 and [35TB] terminal A (PK). Voltage Test
b. No. Go to Test 2. 1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 4 and ground.
7-74 94000390
em01802 Amplifier 1
SW ACCY
Ground
Ground
Power
Power
1. Turn IGN OFF. 10 17 9 16 19 [149A-1]
2. Disconnect [149B-1]. 10 17 9 16 19 [149B-1]
R/PK
R/PK
V/BE
BK
BK
B-50085), remove terminal 4 from [149B-1] (PK/BK). P&A
V/BE 2 2 V/BE
Relay
4. Turn IGN ON.
[2A] [2B]
R/PK
BK
BK
6. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? [1A] 6 14 15
[1B] 6 14 15
Fuse
R/PK
BK
BK
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149B-1] terminal Block
4 and [34TB] terminal B (PK/BK). [64B]
R/PK 6 5 R Main
Fuse
BK
DTC B1443

HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT GND 3
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM Figure 7-44. Amplifier 1: Power Circuit
BREAKOUT BOX
ALL SPEAKERS INOPERATIVE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
BREAKOUT BOX
1. [149-1] Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted
Test Table 7-66. All Speakers Inoperative Diagnostic Faults
1. Turn IGN OFF. POSSIBLE CAUSES
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Shorted to ground circuit wires
Open circuit wires
leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
3. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [34T]. 1. Radio Test
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 1. Turn radio ON.
4. 2. Does radio turn ON?
a. Yes. Repair short between[149-1] terminals 3 and 4 b. No. See audio system in the electrical diagnostic
and [34TB] terminals A and B. manual.
2. Power Terminal 9 Test
2. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Test resistance between [34TB] terminals A and B. 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
2. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms? [149B-1] and amplifier [149A-1].
a. Yes. Replace speaker. 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
b. No. Replace amplifier. HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 9 and
ground.
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 9 and battery
(R/PK).
94000390 7-75
3. Power Terminal 16 Test em01804
Amplifier
RT Tweeter/Mid +
LT Tweeter/Mid +
RT Tweeter/Mid -
LT Tweeter/Mid -
RT Woofer +
LT Woofer +
RT Woofer -
LT Woofer -
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 16 and [149A-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
battery (R/PK). [149B-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
PK/O
PK/GY
BN/R
PK/BK
PK
4. Ground Terminal 10 Test
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
a. Yes. Go to Test 5. A B [35TB] [34TB] A B
A B [35TA] [34TA] A B
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 10 and
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
BN/R
ground (BK).
[35B-1] 2 1 1 2 [34B-1]
5. Ground Terminal 17 Test [35A-1] 2 1 1 2 [34A-1]
PK/BK
PK/BK
PK
PK
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. Left Front Right Front
Tweeter/Mid Tweeter/Mid
ground (BK).
6. Switch Power Terminal 19 Test

PK/BK
PK/BK
PK
PK
1. Turn IGN ON.
[35B-2] 2 1 1 2 [34B-2]
[35A-2] [34A-2]
a. Yes. Remove BOB. Go to Test 7.
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 19 and P&A Left Front Right Front
relay (V/BE). Woofer Woofer
Figure 7-45. Amplifier 1: Front Speakers

7. Amplifier Test
LEFT FAIRING WOOFER SPEAKER LOW
1. Turn IGN OFF. OR NO AUDIO
2. Disconnect [149B-1] from BOB.
3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-1].
4. Turn IGN ON.
5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are all speakers inoperative? BREAKOUT BOX
Table 7-67. Left Fairing Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio
b. No. Replace amplifier. Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Circuit wires shorted together
Circuit wires shorted to ground
Circuit wires shorted to voltage
Open circuit wires
Shorted speaker
Open speaker
1. Left Speaker Circuit Shorted Test

1. Turn IGN OFF.
7-76 94000390
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 2. Test resistance between [35A-1] terminal 1 and [35B-2]
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1], terminal 1 (PK).
3. Test resistance between BOB terminals 5 and 6.
b. No. Repair open between [35B-2] terminal 1 and [35A-1]
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. terminal 1 (PK).
8. [35-2] Terminal 2 Open Test
2. [35B-1] Shorted Test 1. Test resistance between [35A-1] terminal 2 and [35B-2]
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
1. Disconnect speaker harness [35-1].
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 5 and 6.
a. Yes. Repair short between [35B-1] terminals 1 and 2
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
9. [149-1] Terminal 5 Grounded Test
3. Speaker Shorted Test
2. Test resistance between [35A-2] terminals 1 and 2.
10. [35B-1] Terminal 2 Grounded Test
b. No. Repair short between [35A-1] terminals 1 and 2
4. Left Speaker Circuit Open Test 3. Is continuity present?
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals 5 and 6. a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [35B-1] terminal
2 and [149B-1] terminal 5 (BN/GY).
5. [35-1] Terminal 2 Open Test 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
terminal 2 (BN/GY).
12. [35B-1] Terminal 1 Grounded Test
1. Disconnect speaker harness [35B-1].
[149B-1] terminals 5 (BN/GY).
6. [35-1] Terminal 1 Open Test 3. Is continuity present?
1. Test resistance between BOB terminals 6 and [35B-1] a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [35B-1] terminal
terminal 1 (BN/O). 1 and [149B-1] terminal 6 (BN/O).
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? b. No. Repair short to ground between [35A-1] terminal 1
[149B-1] terminal 6 (BN/O).
13. (BN/GY) Circuit Voltage Test
1. Connect [149A-1].
7. [35-2] Terminal 1 Open Test 2. Turn IGN ON.
1. Disconnect speaker [35-2]. 3. Test voltage between BOB terminals 5 and ground.
94000390 7-77
4. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
a. Yes. Go to Test 14. a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
b. No. Go to Test 16. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35B-1] terminal
14. [35B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test
19. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn IGN ON.
2 and [35B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BK). 5. With volume at 3 bars is left woofer speaker inoperative?
15. [149B-1] Terminal 5 Voltage Test b. No. Replace amplifier.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
LEFT FAIRING TWEETER/MID SPEAKER
LOW OR NO AUDIO
B-50085), remove terminal 5 from [149B-1] (BN/GY).
4. Connect [149B-1]. B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR
5. Turn IGN ON. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Table 7-68. Left Fairing Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No
Audio Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35B-1] terminal
2 and [149B-1] terminal 5 (BN/GY). Circuit wires shorted together
16. (BN/O) Circuit Voltage Test Circuit wires shorted to voltage
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground. Open circuit wires
2. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Shorted speaker
a. Yes. Go to Test 17. Open speaker

1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground. leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
3. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 3. Test resistance between BOB terminals 1 and 2.
a. Yes. Go to Test 18. 4. Is resistance less than 2 Ohms?
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35A-1] terminal a. Yes. Go to Test 2.

2. [35T] Shorted Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
B-50085), remove terminal 6 from [149B-1] (BN/O).
a. Yes. Repair short between [35TB] terminals A and B
4. Connect [149B-1].
5. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
7-78 94000390
3. Circuit Open Test b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
10. (PK/GY) Circuit Voltage Test
2. Turn IGN ON.
4. [35T] Terminal B Open Test 4. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [35T]. a. Yes. Go to Test 11.
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 2 and [35B-1] b. No. Go to Test 12.
terminal B (PK/GY).
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? 11. [149B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 5. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair open between [35B-1] terminal B and 2. Disconnect [149B-1].
[149B-1] terminals 2 (PK/GY).
B-50085), remove terminal 2 from [149B-1] (PK/GY).
5. [35T] Terminal A Open Test 4. Connect [149B-1].
5. Turn IGN ON.
terminal A (PK/O).
a. Yes. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
b. No. Repair open between [35TB] terminal A and
[149B-1] terminal 1 (PK/O). b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35TB] terminal B
and [149B-1] terminal 2 (PK/GY).
12. (PK/O) Circuit Voltage Test
7. [35T] Terminal B Grounded Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [35TB] terminal
B-50085), remove terminal 1 from [149B-1] (PK/O).
B and [149B-1] terminal 2 (PK/GY).
5. Turn IGN ON.
8. [149-1] Terminal 1 Grounded Test 6. Test voltage between BOB terminal 1 and ground.
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 1 and ground. 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
2. Is continuity present? a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
a. Yes. Go to Test 9. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [35TB] terminal A
and [149B-1] terminal 1 (PK/O).
14. Amplifier Test

9. [35T] Terminal A Grounded Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn IGN ON.
A and [149B-1] terminal 1 (PK/O).
94000390 7-79
5. With volume at 3 bars is left tweeter/mid speaker 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
inoperative? is in position on BOB.
a. Yes. Replace radio. 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals L1 and
L2.
em01663
Radio
RT Front Out (+)
LT Front Out (+)

RT Front Out (-)
LT Front Out (-)

2. [149B-1] Terminal 20 Open Test
M1 M2 L2 L1 [27A] (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
M1 M2 L2 L1 [27B] leaving amplifier [149A-1] disconnected.
2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal L1 and
PK/GY
amplifier BOB terminal 20.

PK/BK
PK/O
PK

9 10 11 12 [2B] a. Yes. Go to Test 4.
9 10 11 12 [2A]
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
3. [2] Terminal 12 Open Test

22 23 21 20 [149B-1]
22 23 21 20 [149A-1] 2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal L1 and [2B]
terminal 12 (PK/GY).
RT In (+)
RT In (-)
LT In (+)
LT In (-)

a. Yes. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 20 and
[2A] terminal 12 (PK/GY).
Amplifier
b. No. Repair open between [2B] terminal 12 and [27B]
terminal L1 (PK/GY).
Figure 7-46. Radio and Amplifier 1 Circuit 4. [149B-1] Terminal 21 Open Test
BOTH LEFT SPEAKERS LOW OR NO AUDIO 1. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal L2 and
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
BREAKOUT BOX b. No. Go to Test 5.
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE 5. [2] Terminal 11 Open Test
Table 7-69. Both Left Speakers Inoperative Diagnostic 2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal L2 and [2B]
Faults terminal 11 (PK/O).
POSSIBLE CAUSES 3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
Circuit wires shorted together a. Yes. Repair open between [149B-1] terminal 21 and
Circuit wires shorted to ground [2A] terminal 11 (PK/O).
Circuit wires shorted to voltage b. No. Repair open between [2B] terminal 11 and [27B]
terminal L2 (PK/O).
Open circuit wires
1. Circuit Open Test 6. Amplifier Test

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1) 2. Disconnect [149B-1] from BOB.
and BCM CABLE (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2) to wiring 3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-1].
4. Turn IGN ON.
7-80 94000390
5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are both left speakers 1. Right Speaker Circuit Shorted Test
inoperative?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Replace amplifier. (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-1],
em01804
Amplifier 3. Test resistance between BOB terminals 7 and 8.
RT Tweeter/Mid +
LT Tweeter/Mid +
RT Tweeter/Mid -
LT Tweeter/Mid -
RT Woofer +
LT Woofer +
RT Woofer -
LT Woofer -
[149A-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
[149B-1] 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
2. [34B-1] Shorted Test
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
PK/O
PK/GY
BN/R
PK/BK
PK
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
A B [35TB] [34TB] A B
A B [35TA] [34TA] A B
BN/GN
BN/GY
BN/O
BN/R
[35B-1] 2 1 1 2 [34B-1] 3. Speaker Shorted Test

[35A-1] 2 1 1 2 [34A-1]
1. Disconnect woofer speaker [34-2].
PK/BK
PK/BK
PK
PK
2. Test resistance between [34A-2] terminals 1 and 2.

Tweeter/Mid Tweeter/Mid a. Yes. Replace speaker.
b. No. Repair short between [34A-1] terminals 1 and 2
PK/BK
PK/BK
4. Right Speaker Circuit Open Test

PK
PK
[35B-2] 2 1 1 2 [34B-2] 1. Test continuity between BOB terminals 7 and 8.

[35A-2] [34A-2]
Woofer Woofer
Figure 7-47. Amplifier 1: Front Speakers
RIGHT FAIRING WOOFER SPEAKER LOW
OR NO AUDIO 2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 7 and [34B-1]
terminal 1 (BN/R).
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR a. Yes. Go to Test 6.
BREAKOUT BOX
[149B-1] terminal 7 (BN/R).
Table 7-70. Right Fairing Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio
Diagnostic Faults 6. [34-1] Terminal 2 Open Test
POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 8 and [34B-1]
Circuit wires shorted together terminal 2 (BN/GN).
Circuit wires shorted to ground 2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
Circuit wires shorted to voltage a. Yes. Go to Test 7.

Open circuit wires b. No. Repair open between [34B-1] terminal 2 and
[149B-1] terminal 8 (BN/GN).
Shorted speaker
Open speaker
94000390 7-81
7. [34-2] Terminal 2 Open Test 2. Turn IGN ON.
1. Disconnect woofer speaker [34-2]. 3. Test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and ground.
2. Test resistance between [34A-1] terminal 2 and [34B-2] 4. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
b. No. Repair open between [34B-2] terminal 2 and [34A-1] 14. [34B-1] Terminal 1 Voltage Test
terminal 2 (PK/BK).
1. Test resistance between [34A-1] terminal 1 and [34B-2]
terminal 1 (PK). a. Yes. Go to Test 15.
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34A-1] terminal
terminal 1 (PK).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
9. [149-1] Terminal 7 Grounded Test 2. Disconnect [149B-1].
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground. 3. Using TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (PART NUMBER:
B-50085), remove terminal 7 from [149B-1] (BN/R).
5. Turn IGN ON.
10. [34B-1] Terminal 1 Grounded Test 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Disconnect speaker harness [34-1]. a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34B-1] terminal
16. (BN/GN) Circuit Voltage Test
and [34B-2] terminal 1 (PK). 2. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
11. [149-1] Terminal 8 Grounded Test b. No. Go to Test 19.
2. Is continuity present? 17. [34B-1] Terminal 2 Voltage Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 12. 1. Disconnect speaker harness [34-1].
b. No. Go to Test 13. 2. Test voltage between BOB terminal 8 and ground.
12. [34B-1] Terminal 2 Grounded Test a. Yes. Go to Test 18.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 8 and ground. 2 and [34B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BK).
2 and [149B-1] terminal 8 (BN/GN). 1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair short to ground between [34A-1] terminal 2 2. Disconnect [149B-1].
B-50085), remove terminal 8 from [149B-1] (BN/GN).
13. (BN/R) Circuit Voltage Test 4. Connect [149B-1].
1. Connect [149A-1]. 5. Turn IGN ON.
7-82 94000390
6. Test voltage between BOB terminal 8 and ground. 3. Circuit Open Test
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 1. Test continuity between BOB terminals 3 and 4.
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. 2. Is continuity present?
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34B-1] terminal a. Yes. Go to Test 6.
2 and [149B-1] terminal 8 (BN/GN).
19. Amplifier Test

4. [34T] Terminal B Open Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-1]. terminal B (PK/BK).
4. Turn IGN ON. 3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm?
5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Is right woofer speaker a. Yes. Go to Test 5.
inoperative?
b. No. Repair open between [34B-1] terminal B and
a. Yes. Replace radio. [149B-1] terminals 4 (PK/BK).
5. [34T] Terminal A Open Test
RIGHT FAIRING TWEETER/MID SPEAKER 1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 3 and [34TB]
LOW OR NO AUDIO terminal A (PK).
B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR a. Yes. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM b. No. Repair open between [34TB] terminal A and
BREAKOUT BOX [149B-1] terminal 3 (PK).
Table 7-71. Right Fairing Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No

Audio Diagnostic Faults 6. [149-1] Terminal 4 Grounded Test
POSSIBLE CAUSES 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 4 and ground.
Circuit wires shorted together 2. Is continuity present?
Circuit wires shorted to ground a. Yes. Go to Test 7.

Circuit wires shorted to voltage b. No. Go to Test 8.
Open circuit wires
Shorted speaker 7. [34TB] Terminal B Grounded Test
Open speaker 1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [34T].
1. Circuit Shorted Test 3. Is continuity present?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX B and [149B-1] terminal 4 (PK/BK).
2. [34T] Shorted Test
9. [34TB] Terminal A Grounded Test
A and [149B-1] terminal 3 (PK).
94000390 7-83
b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker. 5. With volume at 3 bars is right tweeter/mid speaker
inoperative?
10. (PK/BK) Circuit Voltage Test a. Yes. Replace radio.
1. Connect [149A-1]. b. No. Replace amplifier.
2. Turn IGN ON.
em01663
4. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Radio
RT Front Out (+)
LT Front Out (+)

RT Front Out (-)
LT Front Out (-)

11. [149B-1] Terminal 4 Voltage Test M1 M2 L2 L1 [27A]

1. Turn IGN OFF. M1 M2 L2 L1 [27B]
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
B-50085), remove terminal 4 from [149B-1] (PK/BK).
9 10 11 12 [2B]
9 10 11 12 [2A]
5. Turn IGN ON.
PK/GY
PK/BK
PK/O
PK
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. 22 23 21 20 [149B-1]
22 23 21 20 [149A-1]
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34TB] terminal B
RT In (+)
RT In (-)
LT In (+)
LT In (-)
12. (PK) Circuit Voltage Test

1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 3 and ground. Amplifier

Figure 7-48. Radio and Amplifier 1 Circuit
BOTH RIGHT SPEAKERS LOW OR NO
AUDIO
1. Turn IGN OFF. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
2. Disconnect [149B-1]. HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
BREAKOUT BOX
B-50085), remove terminal 3 from [149B-1] (PK).
4. Connect [149B-1]. HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE
5. Turn IGN ON. HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY
Table 7-72. Both Right Speakers Inoperative Diagnostic
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Faults
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. POSSIBLE CAUSES
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [34TB] terminal A Circuit wires shorted together
14. Amplifier Test
Open circuit wires
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Disconnect [149B-1] from BOB. 1. Circuit Shorted Test
3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-1]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn IGN ON. 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)
7-84 94000390
3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P) 5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are both right speakers
is in position on BOB. inoperative?
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: a. Yes. Replace radio.
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals M1 and
M2.

2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal M1 and

2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal M1 and [2B]
terminal 9 (PK).
[2A] terminal 9 (PK).
terminal M1 (PK).

1. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal M2 and

2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal M2 and [2B]
terminal 10 (PK/BK).
[2A] terminal 10 (PK/BK).
terminal M2 (PK/BK).
6. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn IGN ON.
94000390 7-85
AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2 7.24
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION • If radio is beeping with IGN ON and radio ON, use DIGITAL
TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650) to set regional
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME code.
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II • If B1404 and or B1405 is set, the amplifier needs to be
reflashed using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER:
The amplifier monitors the status of all its speaker circuits. HD-48650).
Many faults may occur that do not set a DTC. These faults are Connector Information
listed in Table 7-74. Verify no DTCs are present before
addressing symptoms. For additional information about the connectors in the following
Table 7-73. Code Description the harness test kit terminal probes, see CONNECTORS
(Page A-1).
DTC DESCRIPTION
B1403 Speaker output DC offset em01972
B1404 Internal thermal shutdown error Amplifier
LT Tweeter/Mid Out +
LT Tweeter/Mid Out -
B1405 EQ correlation error
LT Woofer Out +
LT Woofer Out -
B1406 Invalid or missing EQ
[149A-2] 1 2 5 6
B1412 Channel 1 speaker shorted high [149B-2] 1 2 5 6
PK/Y
PK/BE
LBE/PK
LBE/Y
LBE/PK
PK/BE
LBE/Y
PK/Y

[42TB] A B A B [42WB]
[42TA] A B [42WA]
Left Rear
B1441 Channel 4 speaker shorted low Woofer
Left Rear
Tweeter/Mid
Table 7-74. Symptoms Description
DESCRIPTION
Figure 7-49. Amplifier 2: Left Rear Speakers
All speakers inoperative
DTC B1403, B1404
Left front speaker low or no audio
Both left speakers low or no audio Table 7-75. DTC B1403, B1404 Diagnostic Faults
Left rear speaker pod low or no audio
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Right front fairing speaker low or no audio
Reset needed
Both right speakers low or no audio
Right rear speaker pod low or no audio 1. Fuse Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Diagnostic Tips
2. Remove amplifier fuse.
• Use DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PART NUMBER: HD-48650)
to retrieve amplifier DTCs. 3. After waiting one minute, install amplifier fuse.
• Before testing amplifier, remove amplifier fuse for 1 minute, 4. Turn IGN ON.
install amplifier fuse and verify issue is still present. 5. Clear DTCs.
• Check for radio software updates. 6. Turn radio ON.
7-86 94000390
7. Adjust volume to 8 bars. Allow radio to play for 30 seconds. Table 7-77. DTC B1411 Diagnostic Faults
8. Check DTCs. POSSIBLE CAUSES
9. Did DTC reset? Short to ground in speaker wires
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 5 Circuit Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
DTC B1410 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal 5 and
BREAKOUT BOX ground.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker
Open wiring circuit
2. [149-2] Terminal 6 Circuit Test
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 5 Test 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX a. Yes. Go to Test 4.
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) between wiring harness b. No. Replace amplifier.
3. Disconnect left woofer speaker [42WB].
3. [42W] Terminal A Test
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 1. Disconnect left woofer speaker [42W].
[42WB] terminal B (LBE/PK). 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 5 and ground.
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms? 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
5 and [42WB] terminal A (LBE/PK).
[42WB] terminal B (LBE/PK). b. No. Replace speaker.
2. [149-2] Terminal 6 Test 4. [42W] Terminal B Test

1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 6 and [42WB] 1. Disconnect left woofer speaker [42W].
terminal A (LBE/Y). 2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 6 and ground.
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms? 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
b. No. Repair open between [149B-2] terminal 6 and 6 and [42WB] terminal A (LBE/Y).
[42WB] terminal A (LBE/Y). b. No. Replace speaker.
3. Speaker Test DTC B1412

1. Test resistance between [42WA] speaker terminals A and
B. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. BREAKOUT BOX
DTC B1411 POSSIBLE CAUSES
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 1. Channel 1 Terminal 5 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
BREAKOUT BOX
94000390 7-87
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Amplifier
em01973
RT Tweeter/Mid Out +
RT Tweeter/Mid Out -
RT Woofer Out +
RT Woofer Out -
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Turn radio ON.
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: [149A-2] 3 4 7 8
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 5 and [149B-2] 3 4 7 8
ground.
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
a. Yes. Repair Short to voltage between [149B-2] terminal [288A] 2 11 5 14
5 and [42WB] terminal B (LBE/PK). [288B] 2 11 5 14
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
2. Channel 1 Terminal 6 Voltage Test [162B] 6 9 14 15
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground. [162A] 6 9 14 15
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
6 and [42WB] terminal A (LBE/Y). [162A] 18 17 20 19
[162B] 18 17 20 19
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
DTC B1413
[298B] 2 5 1 4
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME [298A] 2 5 1 4
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R
BREAKOUT BOX
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R
POSSIBLE CAUSES [41TB] A B
[41TA] A B
A B [41WB]
Short in speaker wires [41WA]
1. Channel 1 [42WB] Test

1. Turn IGN OFF.
Right Rear
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Woofer
Right Rear
3. Disconnect left woofer speaker [42W]. Tweeter/Mid
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: Figure 7-50. Amplifier 2: Right Rear Speakers
6.
DTC B1420
5. Is continuity present? PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
a. Yes. Repair short between [149B-2] terminals 5 and 6 HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
and [42WB] terminals A and B. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
b. No. Go to Test 2. BREAKOUT BOX

2. Speaker Test
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Test resistance between [42WA] speaker terminals A and
Open speaker
B.
Open wiring circuit
a. Yes. Replace speaker. 1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 7 Test
7-88 94000390
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Table 7-81. DTC B1421 Diagnostic Faults
and amplifier [149A-2]. POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short to ground in speaker wires
3. Disconnect right woofer speaker [41W].
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 1. Channel 1 [149-2] Terminal 7 Test
[41WB] terminal A (LBE/R). 1. Turn IGN OFF.
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms? 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected.
b. No. Go to Test 3. 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
2. [149-1] Terminal 8 Test ground.
1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 8 and [41WB] 4. Is continuity present?

terminal B (LBE/GN). a. Yes. Go to Test 3.
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms? b. No. Go to Test 2.
b. No. Go to Test 4. 2. [149-2] Terminal 8 Test
3. [298] Terminal 1 Test 2. Is continuity present?
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. a. Yes. Go to Test 4.
2. Test resistance between [298A] terminal 1 and [41WB] b. No. Replace amplifier.
terminal A (LBE/R).
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms? 3. [298] Terminal 1 Test
a. Yes. Repair open between [298B] terminal 1 and 1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
[149B-2] terminal 7 (LBE/R).
b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 1 and [41WB]
terminal A (LBE/R). 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [298B] terminal
4. [298] Terminal 4 Test 1 and [149B-2] terminal 7 (LBE/R).
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 1
and [41WB] terminal A (LBE/R).
2. Test resistance between [298A] terminal 4 and [41WB]
terminal B (LBE/GN).
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms?
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 4 and [41WB]
terminal A (LBE/GN). 3. Is continuity present?
5. Speaker Test 4 and [149B-2] terminal 8 (LBE/GN).
1. Test resistance between [41WB] terminals A and B. b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 4
and [41WB] terminal A (LBE/BN).
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. DTC B1422
DTC B1421 B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT BREAKOUT BOX
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM Table 7-82. DTC B1422 Diagnostic Faults
BREAKOUT BOX
POSSIBLE CAUSES
94000390 7-89
1. [149-2] Terminal 7 Woofer Speaker Voltage 6. [149-2] Terminal 8 Voltage Test
Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
B-50085), remove terminal 8 from [149B-2] (LBE/GN).
4. Turn IGN ON.
3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Turn radio ON.
HD-41404), test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
ground.
6. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 8 and [298B] terminal 4 (LBE/GN).
DTC B1423
2. [298] Terminal 1 Voltage Test HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
3. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Table 7-83. DTC B1423 Diagnostic Faults
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. POSSIBLE CAUSES
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [298A] terminal 1 Short in speaker wires
and woofer [41WB] terminal A (LBE/R).
1. Channel 1 [149-2] Test
3. [149-2] Terminal 7 Voltage Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Turn IGN OFF. 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
3. Disconnect right woofer speaker [41W].
B-50085), remove terminal 7 from [149B-2] (LBE/R).
4. Turn IGN ON.
5. Test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and ground. 8.
6. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 5. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. a. Yes. Repair short between [149B-2] terminals 7 and 8
and [41WB] terminals A and B.
7 and [298B] terminal 1 (LBE/R). b. No. Go to Test 2.
4. [149-2] Terminal 8 Woofer Speaker Voltage 2. Speaker Test

Test 1. Test resistance between [41WA] terminals A and B.
5. [298] Terminal 4 Voltage Test

and woofer [41WB] terminal B (LBE/GN).
7-90 94000390
em01972
Amplifier Test
terminal B (PK/BE).
LT Woofer Out +
LT Woofer Out -
[149A-2] 1 2 5 6 b. No. Repair open between [149B-2] terminal 2 and
[149B-2] 1 2 5 6 [42TB] terminal B (PK/BE).
PK/Y
PK/BE
LBE/PK
LBE/Y
1. Test continuity between [42TA] terminal A and B.
LBE/PK
PK/BE
LBE/Y
PK/Y
[42TB] A B A B [42WB]
[42TA] A B [42WA]
DTC B1431

Left Rear HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
Woofer HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX

Left Rear
Tweeter/Mid
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short to ground in speaker wires
Figure 7-51. Amplifier 2: Left Rear Speakers
DTC B1430 1. [149-2] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
Grounded Test
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 1. Turn IGN OFF.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2],
BREAKOUT BOX leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected.
Table 7-84. DTC B1430 Diagnostic Faults 3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
POSSIBLE CAUSES ground.
Open speaker 4. Is continuity present?
Open wiring circuit a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
1 and tweeter/mid speaker [42TB] terminal A.
1. [149-2] Terminal 1 Tweeter/Mid Open Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 2. [149-1] Terminal 2 Tweeter/Mid Speaker
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2] Grounded Test
HD-41404), test resistance between BOB terminal 1 and a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
[42TB] terminal A (PK/Y). 2 and tweeter/mid speaker [42TB] terminal B.
5. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Replace amplifier.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. DTC B1432

b. No. Replace open between [149B-2] terminal 1 and
[42TB] terminal A (PK/Y). PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
94000390 7-91
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME b. No. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM 2 and [42TB] terminal B (PK/BE).
BREAKOUT BOX
DTC B1433
POSSIBLE CAUSES
BREAKOUT BOX
Voltage Test Table 7-87. DTC B1433 Diagnostic Faults
1. Turn IGN OFF. POSSIBLE CAUSES
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX Shorted speaker wires
1. [149-2] Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted Test
3. Turn IGN ON.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
4. Turn radio ON.
5. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2],
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminal 1 and leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected.
ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals 1 and
2.
2. [149-2] Terminal 1 Voltage Test a. Yes. Repair short between [149B-2] terminals 1 and 2
1. Turn IGN OFF.
B-50085), remove terminal 1 from [149B-2] (PK/Y).
1. Test resistance between [42TB] terminals 1 and 2.
4. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Repair short to ground between [149B-2] terminal
1 and [42TB] terminal A (PK/Y).

Voltage Test

1. Turn IGN OFF.
B-50085), remove terminal 2 from [149B-2] (PK/BE).
4. Turn IGN ON.
7-92 94000390
Amplifier 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
em01973
RT Woofer Out +
RT Woofer Out -
[149A-2] 3 4 7 8 [41TB] terminal A (PK/BN).
[149B-2] 3 4 7 8
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
[288A] 2 11 5 14 b. No. Go to Test 3.

[288B] 2 11 5 14
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
Test
[162B] 6 9 14 15 1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 4 and [41TB]
[162A] 6 9 14 15
terminal B (PK/GN).
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
[162A] 18 17 20 19
[162B] 18 17 20 19
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R

[298B] 2 5 1 4
[298A] 2 5 1 4 2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 3 and [298B]
terminal 2 (PK/BN).
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R

a. Yes. Repair open between [298B] terminal 2 and
PK/GN
PK/BN
[149B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BN).

LBE/GN
LBE/R
b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 2 and [41TB]

[41TB] A B
A B [41WB] terminal A (PK/GN).
[41TA] A B
[41WA]
Right Rear
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 4 and [298B]
Woofer terminal 5 (PK/GN).
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms?
Right Rear a. Yes. Repair open between [298B] terminal 5 and
Tweeter/Mid
[149B-2] terminal 5 (PK/GN).
Figure 7-52. Amplifier 2: Right Rear Speakers
b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 5 and [41TB]
DTC B1440 terminal B (PK/GN).
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME 5. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test

1. Test resistance between [41TB] terminals A and B.
BREAKOUT BOX 2. Is resistance less than 2 ohms?
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open speaker DTC B1441
Open wiring circuit
1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker Open HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
Test HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
1. Turn IGN OFF. BREAKOUT BOX
94000390 7-93
Table 7-89. DTC B1441 Diagnostic Faults Table 7-90. DTC B1442 Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short to ground in speaker wires Short to voltage in speaker wires
1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker 1. [149-2] Terminal 3 Tweeter/Mid Speaker

Grounded Test Voltage Test
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2], (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2]
leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected. and amplifier [149A-2].
3. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: 3. Turn IGN ON.
4. Turn radio ON.
ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. ground.
b. No. Go to Test 2. 6. Is battery voltage present?
2. [149-2] Terminal 4 Tweeter/Mid Speaker b. No. Go to Test 4.
Grounded Test
2. [298] Terminal 2 Voltage Test
3. [298] Terminal 2 Grounded Test
and tweeter/mid [41TB] terminal A (PK/BN).
3. Is continuity present? 3. [149-2] Terminal 2 Voltage Test
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [298B] terminal 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2 and [149B-2] terminal 3 (PK/BN).
and [41TB] terminal A (PK/BN).
B-50085), remove terminal 3 from [149B-2] (LBE/Y).
4. Turn IGN ON.
3 and [298B] terminal 2 (PK/BN).
5 and [149B-2] terminal 4 (PK/GN).
and [41TB] terminal B (PK/GN).
Voltage Test
DTC B1442 1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 4 and ground.
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT b. No. Replace amplifier.
BREAKOUT BOX 5. [298] Terminal 5 Voltage Test
7-94 94000390
em01974
Amplifier 2
SW ACCY
Ground
Ground
Ground
Power
Power
and tweeter/mid [41TB] terminal B (PK/GN).
10 12 17 9 16 19 [149A-2]
10 12 17 9 16 19 [149B-2]
R/Y
BK
BK
BK
R
1. Turn IGN OFF.
R/Y
BK
BK
R
B-50085), remove terminal 4 from [149B-2] (PK/GN).
[288A] 15 16 7 8 6 [288A-1]
4. Turn IGN ON. [288B] [288B-1]
15 16 7 8 6
R/Y
BK
BK
R
R
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. [298B] 12 13 3 4 5
[298A] 12 13 3 4 5
R/Y
BK
BK
R
4 and [298B] terminal 5 (PK/GN).
BCM
DTC B1443 R/Y Accessory
Power
BK
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME Fuse Block
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT [64B]
R 20 19 R
BREAKOUT BOX GND 3

Figure 7-53. Amplifier 2: Power Circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSES
ALL SPEAKERS INOPERATIVE

1. [149-2] Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Shorted
Test HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
1. Turn IGN OFF.
BREAKOUT BOX
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2], Table 7-92. All Speakers Inoperative Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
3. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [41T]. Shorted to ground circuit wires
4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER: Open circuit wires
4.
1. Radio Test
1. Turn radio ON.
2. Does radio turn ON?
b. No. See audio system in the electrical diagnostic
manual.
2. Right Tweeter/Mid Speaker Test
1. Test resistance between [41TB] terminals A and B.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Replace amplifier. (PART NUMBER: HD-47918) between wiring harness
ground.
94000390 7-95
em01972
a. Yes. Go to Test 3. Amplifier
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 9 and battery
LT Woofer Out +
LT Woofer Out -
(R).

1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 16 and ground. [149A-2] 1 2 5 6
[149B-2] 1 2 5 6
PK/Y
PK/BE
LBE/PK
LBE/Y
battery (R).
LBE/PK
PK/BE
LBE/Y
PK/Y
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 10 and ground. [42TB] A B A B [42WB]
2. Is continuity present? [42TA] A B [42WA]
ground (BK).
Left Rear
Woofer
Left Rear
2. Is continuity present? Tweeter/Mid
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 17 and Figure 7-54. Amplifier 2: Left Rear Speakers
ground (BK). LEFT SADDLEBAG WOOFER SPEAKER
LOW OR NO AUDIO
6. Switch Power Terminal 19 Test
1. Turn IGN ON.
2. Test voltage between BOB terminal 19 and ground. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
3. Is battery voltage present? BREAKOUT BOX
a. Yes. Remove BOB. Go to Test 7. Table 7-93. Left Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No
b. No. Repair open between [149-1] terminal 19 and P&A Audio Diagnostic Faults
relay (R/Y).
POSSIBLE CAUSES
7. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Open circuit wires
Shorted speaker
4. Turn IGN ON. Open speaker
5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are all speakers inoperative?
a. Yes. Replace radio. 1. Left Speaker Circuit Shorted Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
7-96 94000390
2. [42W] Shorted Test 3. Turn IGN ON.
1. Disconnect left woofer [42W]. 4. Test voltage between BOB terminals 5 and ground.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 5 and 6. 5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
a. Yes. Repair short between [42WB] terminals A and B b. No. Go to Test 10.
b. No. Replace speaker. 9. [149B-2] Terminal 5 Voltage Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
3. Left Speaker Circuit Open Test 2. Disconnect [149B-2].
2. Is continuity present? B-50085), remove terminal 5 from [149B-2] (LBE/PK).
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. 4. Connect [149B-2].
4. [42W] Terminal A Open Test 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Disconnect left woofer [42W].
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 5 and [42WB]
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149-2] terminal 5
terminal B (LBE/PK).
and [42WB] terminal A (LBE/PK).
a. Yes. Go to Test 5. 10. (LBE/Y) Circuit Voltage Test
b. No. Repair open between [42WB] terminal A and 1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
[149B-2] terminals 5 (LBE/PK).
5. [42W] Terminal B Open Test
1. Test resistance between BOB terminals 6 and [42WB]
terminal B (LBE/Y).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair open between [42WB] terminal B and
[149B-2] terminal 6 (LBE/Y). 3. Using TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (PART NUMBER:
6. [149-2] Terminal 5 Grounded Test 4. Connect [149B-2].
1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 5 and ground. 5. Turn IGN ON.
2. Is continuity present? 6. Test voltage between BOB terminal 6 and ground.
a. Yes. Go to Test 7. 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
b. No. Go to Test 8. a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
7. [42W] Terminal A Grounded Test 6 and [42WB] terminal B (LBE/Y).
12. Amplifier Test
2. Test continuity between terminal 5 and ground.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [42WB] terminal
A and [149B-1] terminal 5 (LBE/PK). 3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-2].
b. No. Repair short to ground between [42WB] terminal 4. Turn IGN ON.
B and [149B-2] terminal 6 (LBE/Y). 5. With volume at 3 bars is front left speaker inoperative?
8. (LBE/PK) Circuit Voltage Test
94000390 7-97
LEFT SADDLEBAG TWEETER/MID 5. [42T] Terminal A Open Test
SPEAKER LOW OR NO AUDIO 1. Test resistance between BOB terminal 1 and [42TB]
terminal A (PK/Y).
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM a. Yes. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
BREAKOUT BOX b. No. Repair open between [42TB] terminal A and
[149B-2] terminal 1 (PK/Y).
Table 7-94. Left Saddlebag Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or
No Audio Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open circuit wires
Shorted speaker
Open speaker
1. Circuit Shorted Test 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 2 and ground.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [42TB] terminal
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2], B and [149B-2] terminal 2 (PK/BE).
4. Is resistance less than 2 ohms? 8. [149-2] Terminal 1 Grounded Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 1 and ground.
b. No. Go to Test 3. 2. Is continuity present?
2. [42T] Shorted Test b. No. Go to Test 10.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 1 and 2. 9. [42T] Terminal A Grounded Test
3. Is continuity present? 1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [42T].
a. Yes. Repair short between [42TB] terminals A and B 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 1 and ground.
A and [149B-2] terminal 1 (PK/Y).
3. Circuit Open Test b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
2. Is continuity present? 10. (PK/BE) Circuit Voltage Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. 1. Connect [149A-2].
4. [42T] Terminal B Open Test 4. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
terminal B (PK/BE).
1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair open between [42TB] terminal B and
[149B-1] terminal 2 (PK/BE).
7-98 94000390
em01975 Radio
B-50085), remove terminal 2 from [149B-2] (PK/BE).
RT Rear Spkr +
LT Rear Spkr +
RT Rear Spkr -
LT Rear Spkr -
5. Turn IGN ON.
H1 J1 K1 K2 [27A]
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? [27B]
H1 J1 K1 K2
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
2 and [42TB] terminal B (PK/BE).
2 1 3 4 [162A]
2 1 3 4 [162B]
12. (PK/Y) Circuit Voltage Test
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
12 3 4 13 [288B]
12 3 4 13 [288A]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
20 21 22 23 [149B-2]
1. Turn IGN OFF.
20 21 22 23 [149A-2]
RT IN +
RT IN -
LT IN -
LT IN +
B-50085), remove terminal 1 from [149B-2] (PK/Y).
Amplifier
5. Turn IGN ON.
BOTH LEFT SPEAKERS LOW OR NO AUDIO
a. Yes. Replace radio. PART NUMBER TOOL NAME
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149B-2] terminal HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT
1 and [42TB] terminal A (PK/Y). HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
14. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Table 7-95. Both Left Speakers Inoperative Diagnostic
Faults
4. Turn IGN ON.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
5. With volume at 3 bars is left tweeter/mid speaker
Open circuit wires
inoperative?
a. Yes. Replace radio. 1. Circuit Open Test
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals H1 and
J1.
94000390 7-99
2. [149B-2] Terminal 20 Open Test em01973
Amplifier
RT Woofer Out +
RT Woofer Out -
2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal H1 and
[149A-2] 3 4 7 8
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? [149B-2] 3 4 7 8
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
b. No. Repair open between [149-2] terminal 20 and [27B]
terminal H1 (LBE/GY). [288A] 2 11 5 14
[288B] 2 11 5 14
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
1. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal J1 and
amplifier BOB terminal 21. [162B] 6 9 14 15
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? [162A] 6 9 14 15
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
[162A] 18 17 20 19
terminal J1 (LBE/O).
[162B] 18 17 20 19
LBE/GN
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/R
4. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
[298B] 2 5 1 4
2. Disconnect [149B-2] from BOB. [298A] 2 5 1 4
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R
4. Turn IGN ON.
5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are both left speakers
PK/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
inoperative?
LBE/R
a. Yes. Replace radio. [41TB] A B
[41TA] A B
A B [41WB]
b. No. Replace amplifier. [41WA]
Right Rear
Woofer
Right Rear
Tweeter/Mid
Figure 7-56. Amplifier 2: Right Rear Speakers

RIGHT SADDLEBAG WOOFER SPEAKER
LOW OR NO AUDIO

BREAKOUT BOX
Table 7-96. Right Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No

POSSIBLE CAUSES
Open circuit wires
7-100 94000390
Table 7-96. Right Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No 6. [41W] Terminal B Open Test
1. Test resistance between [41WB] terminal B (LBE/Y) and
POSSIBLE CAUSES [149B-2] terminal 8 (LBE/BK).
Shorted speaker 2. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
Open speaker a. Yes. Replace speaker.
1. Right Speaker Circuit Shorted Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
leaving amplifier [149A-2] disconnected. 2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 8 and [298B]
terminal 4 (LBE/GN).
a. Yes. Repair open between [298A] terminal 4 and
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. [41WB] terminal B (LBE/GN).
b. No. Go to Test 3. b. No. Repair open between [298] terminal 4 and [149B-2]
terminal 8 (LBE/GN).
2. [41W] Shorted Test
1. Disconnect woofer speaker [41W]. 8. [149-2] Terminal 7 Grounded Test
2. Test continuity between BOB terminals 7 and 8. 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground.
3. Is continuity present? 2. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair short between [41WB] terminals A and B a. Yes. Go to Test 9.
and [149B-2] terminals 7 and 8. b. No. Go to Test 11.
9. [41W] Terminal A Grounded Test
3. Right Speaker Circuit Open Test 1. Disconnect woofer speaker [41W].
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals 7 and 8. 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground.
2. Is continuity present? 3. Is continuity present?
b. No. Go to Test 4. b. No. Replace speaker.
4. [41W] Terminal A Open Test 10. [298] Terminal 1 Grounded Test

1. Disconnect woofer speaker [41W]. 1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 7 and [41WB] 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground.
terminal A (LBE/R).
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. 1 and [149B-2] terminal 7 (LBE/R).
b. No. Go to Test 5. b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 1
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. 11. [149-2] Terminal 8 Grounded Test
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 7 and [298B] 1. Test continuity between BOB terminal 8 and ground.
terminal 1 (LBE/R). 2. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Repair open between [298A] terminal 1 and b. No. Go to Test 14.
[41WB] terminal A (LBE/R).
b. No. Repair open between [298B] terminal 1 and
12. [41W] Terminal B Grounded Test
[149B-2] terminal 7 (LBE/R).
1. Disconnect woofer speaker [41W].
94000390 7-101
3. Is continuity present? 18. [298] Terminal 4 Voltage Test
a. Yes. Go to Test 13. 1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
b. No. Replace speaker. 2. Test voltage between BOB terminal 8 and ground.
13. [298] Terminal 1 Grounded Test a. Yes. Go to Test 19.
2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 7 and ground. and [41WB] terminal B (LBE/GN).
1 and [149B-2] terminal 7 (LBE/R). 1. Turn IGN OFF.
b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 1 2. Disconnect [149B-2].
B-50085), remove terminal 8 from [149B-2] (LBE/GN).
14. (LBE/R) Circuit Voltage Test 4. Connect [149B-2].
5. Turn IGN ON.
2. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Go to Test 17. 8 and [298B] terminal 4 (LBE/GN).
15. [298] Terminal 1 Voltage Test 20. Amplifier Test

1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Test voltage between BOB terminal 7 and ground. 2. Disconnect [149B-2] from BOB.
3. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 3. Connect a known good amplifier to [149B-2].
a. Yes. Go to Test 16. 4. Turn IGN ON.
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [298] terminal 1 5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Is rear right woofer speaker
and [41WB] terminal A (LBE/R). inoperative?
16. [149B-2] Terminal 7 Voltage Test b. No. Replace amplifier.
1. Turn IGN OFF.
RIGHT SADDLEBAG TWEETER/MID
SPEAKER LOW OR NO AUDIO
B-50085), remove terminal 7 from [149B-2] (LBE/BN).
4. Connect [149B-2]. B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR
5. Turn IGN ON. HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
BREAKOUT BOX
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Table 7-97. Right Saddlebag Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or
No Audio Diagnostic Faults
POSSIBLE CAUSES
7 and [298B] terminal 1 (LBE/R). Circuit wires shorted together
17. (LBE/GN) Circuit Voltage Test Circuit wires shorted to voltage
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 8 and ground. Open circuit wires
2. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? Shorted speaker
a. Yes. Go to Test 18. Open speaker

1. Turn IGN OFF.
7-102 94000390
2. Connect ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 3 and [298B]
(PART NUMBER: HD-47918) to wiring harness [149B-2], terminal 3 (PK/BN).
a. Yes. Repair open between [298B] terminal 2 and [149-2]
4. Is resistance less than 2 ohms? terminal 3 (PK/GN).
a. Yes. Go to Test 2. b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 2 and [41TB]
terminal A (PK/BN).
2. [41T] Shorted Test 8. [149-2] Terminal 4 Grounded Test

1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [41TB].
3. Circuit Open Test 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 4 and ground.
1. Test continuity between BOB terminals 3 and 4. 3. Is continuity present?
a. Yes. Go to Test 8. b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
4. [41T] Terminal B Open Test 1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298].
1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [41T]. 2. Test continuity between BOB terminal 4 and ground.
2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 4 and [41TB] 3. Is continuity present?
terminal B (PK/GN).
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? 5 and [149B-2] terminal 5 (PK/GN).
a. Yes. Go to Test 6. b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 5
and [41TB] terminal B (PK/GN).
5. [298] Terminal 5 Open Test 11. [149-2] Terminal 3 Grounded Test

2. Test resistance between BOB terminal 4 and [298B]
terminal 5 (PK/GN). a. Yes. Go to Test 12.
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm? b. No. Go to Test 14.
a. Yes. Repair open between [298B] terminal 5 and [149-2]
terminal 4 (PK/GN). 12. [41T] Terminal A Grounded Test
b. No. Repair open between [298A] terminal 5 and [41TB] 1. Disconnect tweeter/mid speaker [41T].
terminal B (PK/GN).
6. [41T] Terminal A Open Test
1. Test resistance between BOB terminals 3 and [41TB]
terminal A (PK/BN). b. No. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
a. Yes. Replace tweeter/mid speaker.
7. [298] Terminal 2 Open Test 3. Is continuity present?
1. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. a. Yes. Repair short to ground between [298B] terminal
2 and [149B-2] terminal 3 (PK/BN).
94000390 7-103
b. No. Repair short to ground between [298A] terminal 2 b. No. Repair short to voltage between [298A] terminal 2
and [41TB] terminal A (PK/BN). and [41TB] terminal A (PK/BN).
14. (LBE/GN) Circuit Voltage Test 19. [149B-2] Terminal 3 Voltage Test
1. Connect [149A-2]. 1. Turn IGN OFF.
2. Turn IGN ON. 2. Disconnect [149B-2].
3. Test voltage between BOB terminal 4 and ground. 3. Using TERMINAL EXTRACTOR (PART NUMBER:
5. Turn IGN ON.
15. (298) Terminal 5 Voltage Test 7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V?
1. Turn IGN OFF. a. Yes. Replace amplifier.
2. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149B-2] terminal
3 and [298B] terminal 5 (PK/GN).
3. Turn IGN ON.
20. Amplifier Test
1. Turn IGN OFF.
and [41TB] terminal B (LBE/GN).
4. Turn IGN ON.
16. [149B-2] Terminal 4 Voltage Test 5. With volume at 3 bars is left tweeter/mid speaker
inoperative?
1. Turn IGN OFF.
B-50085), remove terminal 4 from [149B-2] (PK/GN).
BOTH RIGHT SPEAKERS LOW OR NO
4. Connect [149B-2]. AUDIO
5. Turn IGN ON.
7. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM
a. Yes. Replace amplifier. BREAKOUT BOX
b. No. Repair short to voltage between [149B-2] terminal HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX
4 and [298B] terminal 5 (PK/GN). HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE
17. (PK/BN) Circuit Voltage Test Table 7-98. Both Right Speakers Low or No Audio Diagnost-
1. Test voltage between BOB terminal 3 and ground. ic Faults
2. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? POSSIBLE CAUSES
a. Yes. Go to Test 18. Open circuit wires
18. (298) Terminal 2 Voltage Test 1. Turn IGN OFF.
1. Turn IGN OFF. 2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-1)

2. Disconnect right saddlebag [298]. harness [27B], leaving radio [27A] disconnected.
3. Turn IGN ON. 3. Verify BCM OVERLAY (PART NUMBER: HD-50390-2-P)
4. Test voltage between BOB terminal 3 and ground. is in position on BOB.
5. Is voltage greater than 9.0V? 4. Using TEST CONNECTOR KIT (PART NUMBER:
HD-41404), test continuity between BOB terminals K1 and
a. Yes. Go to Test 19. K2.
7-104 94000390
5. Is continuity present? 5. Adjust volume to 3 bars. Are both right speakers
inoperative?
em01975 Radio
RT Rear Spkr +
LT Rear Spkr +
RT Rear Spkr -
LT Rear Spkr -
2. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal K1 and
H1 J1 K1 K2 [27A]
3. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? H1 J1 K1 K2 [27B]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
terminal K1 (LBE).
2 1 3 4 [162A]
2 1 3 4 [162B]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
1. Test resistance between radio BOB terminal K2 and
LBE
2. Is resistance less than 0.5 Ohm? 12 3 4 13 [288B]
12 3 4 13 [288A]
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE/O
LBE
terminal K2 (LBE/BK).
20 21 22 23 [149B-2]
4. Amplifier Test 20 21 22 23 [149A-2]
RT IN +
RT IN -
LT IN -
LT IN +
1. Turn IGN OFF.
Amplifier
4. Turn IGN ON.
94000390 7-105
NOTES
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
A.1 CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 WIRING DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................ A-3
A.3 CONNECTOR END VIEWS ............................................................................................... A-23
A.4 COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS .................................................................................... A-30
A.5 TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR ............................................................................... A-33
APPENDIX A WIRING
NOTES
CONNECTORS A.1
CONNECTORS Connector Number
On wiring diagrams and in service/repair instructions,
Function and Location connectors are identified by a number in brackets.
Refer to Table A-1. On the motorcycle, a connector can be
identified by its function and location. The connectors in the Repair Instructions
table are not found in service manual. The repair instructions in service manual are by connector
type.
Place and Color
The place (number of wire cavities of a housing) and color of
the connector can also aid identification.
Table A-1. Connector Locations
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION TYPE PROBE COL- LOCATION
NO. OR
16-place Molex MX 150 Sealed Inner fairing - right radio support
[1] Main to interconnect harness Gray
(BK) bracket
12-place Molex MX 150 Sealed Inner fairing - left radio support
[2] Main to interconnect harness Gray
(BK) bracket
8-place Molex MX 150 Sealed
[13] Fuel tank harness Gray Under seat
(GY)
4-place Deutsch DT Sealed
[18] Left STT Black Behind left tail lamp
(BK)
4-place Deutsch DT Sealed
[19] Right STT Black Behind right tail lamp
(BK)
Right front tweet/midrange 2-place Delphi 150 Metripack
[34T] Gray Inner fairing (right speaker enclosure)
speaker Sealed (BK)
[34W] Right front woofer Gray Inner fairing (right speaker enclosure)
(BK)
Left front tweeter/midrange 2-place Delphi 150 Metripack
[35T] Gray Inner fairing (left speaker enclosure)
speaker Sealed (BK)
[35W] Left front woofer Gray Inner fairing (left speaker enclosure)
(BK)
Right saddlebag 2-place Delphi 150 Metripack
[41T] tweeter/midrange speaker Sealed (R) Gray Inside right saddlebag
2-Place Delphi GT 150 3.5mm
[41W] Right saddlebag woofer Sealed (BK) Gray Inside right saddlebag
Left saddlebag 2-place Delphi 150 Metripack
[42T] tweeter/midrange speaker Sealed (R) Gray Inside left saddlebag
[42W] Left saddlebag woofer Sealed (BK) Gray Inside left saddlebag
2-place Delphi 630 Metripack
[43] Rear amp fuse Sealed (BK) Gray Under seat
4-place Deutsch DTM Sealed
[45] LP lamp (BK) Brown Behind LP lamp
[51] Radio antenna cable Inner fairing - back of radio (left side)
[53] Rider headset (BK) Gray Inner fairing (right speaker enclosure)
23-place Tyco AMPSEAL
[149-1] Audio amp front Sealed (BK) Breakout box Under fairing above radio
23-place Tyco AMPSEAL
[149-2] Audio amp rear Sealed (BK) Breakout box Inside left saddlebag
[162] Rear audio (BK) Gray Under seat
94000390 A-1
Table A-1. Connector Locations
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION TYPE PROBE COL- LOCATION
NO. OR
[185] XM antenna Inner fairing - back of radio
[213] Fork lock Sealed (BK) Gray Bottom for fork lock
[225] Rider headset 7-place DIN (BK) Inner fairing
48-way Molex CMC Sealed
[242] BCM (BK) Breakout box Under left side cover
2-place Deutsch DTM Sealed
[277] LED console light (BK) Brown Under console
Big - Purple
Small female -
Gray
Small male -
[288] Left saddlebag 12-place Tyco HDSCS Light blue Left saddlebag
[298] Right saddlebag 4-place Tyco HDSCS Purple Right saddlebag
[299-2] P&A accessory power (BK) Gray Behind fairing under radio
A-2 94000390
WIRING DIAGRAMS A.2
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION ed03175
5
Wire Color Codes
3 4
Wire traces on wiring diagrams are labeled with alpha codes. 6
Refer to Table A-2.
For Solid Color Wires: See Figure A-1. The alpha code 1 2 7
identifies wire color.
GN/Y
W
For Striped Wires: The code is written with a slash (/) between 8
the solid color code and the stripe code. For example, a trace [21A] 1 2
labeled GN/Y is a green wire with a yellow stripe. [21B] 1 2

9
GN/Y
Wiring Diagram Symbols
See Figure A-1. On wiring diagrams and in service/repair 1 2 10
instructions, connectors are identified by a number in brackets
[ ]. The letter inside the brackets identifies whether the housing
is a socket or pin housing. 13 11
A=Pin: The letter A and the pin symbol after a connector
number identifies the pin side of the terminal connectors. 12
B=Socket: The letter B the socket symbol after a connector
number identifies the socket side of the terminal connectors. 1. Connector number
2. Terminal code (A=pin, B=socket)
Other symbols found on the wiring diagrams include the 3. Solid wire color
following: 4. Striped wire color
5. Socket symbol
Diode: The diode allows current flow in one direction only in 6. Pin symbol
a circuit. 7. Diode
Wire break: The wire breaks are used to show option variances 8. Wire break
or page breaks. 9. No connection
10. Circuit to/from
No Connection: Two wires crossing over each other in a wiring 11. Splice
diagram that are shown with no splice indicating they are not 12. Ground
connected together. 13. Twisted pair
Circuit to/from: This symbol is used to identify there is a more Figure A-1. Connector/Wiring Diagram Symbols
complete circuit diagram on another page. The symbol is also ed03380
identifying the direction of current flow.
Splice: Splices are where two or more wires are connected

together along a wiring diagram. The location of the splice 6 5 4 3 2 1
indicated in the wiring diagram is not the true location of the 8 1 2

12 11 10 9 8 7
splice in the actual harness but to identify that the wires are
spliced to that circuit. 9 10 3
18 17 16 15
14 13
OMRON OMRON
G8VA-1A4T G8VA-1A4T
Ground: Grounds can be classified as either clean or dirty -R01 -R01 4
grounds. Clean grounds are identified by a (BK/GN) wire and
12VDC
7 JAPAN 12VDC
6 JAPAN
20 19
are normally used for sensors or modules. These grounds 2755D5 2755D5 5
24 23 22 21
usually do not have electric motors, coils or anything that may
cause electrical interference on the ground circuit. The dirty
grounds are identified by a (BK) wire and are used for
components that are not as sensitive to electrical interference.
Twisted pair: This symbol indicates the two wires are twisted 1. System power
together in the harness. This minimizes the circuit's 2. Battery
electromagnetic interference from external sources. If repairs 3. Spare
are necessary to these wires they should remain as twisted 4. Spare
wires. 5. Spare
6. Cooling relay
7. P&A relay
8. Radio
9. P&A
10. Cooling
Figure A-2. Fuse Block [64B]
94000390 A-3
Table A-2. Wire Color Codes Table A-2. Wire Color Codes
ALPHA CODE WIRE COLOR ALPHA CODE WIRE COLOR
BE Blue PK Pink
BK Black R Red
BN Brown TN Tan
GN Green V Violet
GY Gray W White
LBE Light Blue Y Yellow
LGN Light Green
WIRING DIAGRAMS
O Orange
WIRING DIAGRAM LIST

FIGURE NUMBER
Front Lighting and Hand Controls: 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-3.
Fairing Harness: 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-4.
Main Harness (1 of 4): 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-5.
Rear Lighting: 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-9.
Radio (1 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-10.
Radio (2 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE Figure A-11.
A-4 94000390
et00852
RHCM
[22D-2] [22C-2]
W/GY 1 1 Engine Stop Switch
R/O 1 1 Battery Fuse Heated

BK/GN 2 2 Ground
Hand Grips
(If Equipped)
W/R 3 3 CAN High TGS
W/BK 4 4 CAN Low
[22D-1] [22C-1]
5V Sensor Ground 2
5V Sensor Ground 1
5V Sensor Power 2
5V Sensor Power 1
BK
BK
P&A Power
Right
Ground
TGS 2
TGS 1
Auxiliary
Lamp
Front Brake
W
W
W
BK
BK
BK
R
R
Switch
[73RB]
BK
[31RB]
[204B]
GY/BK 4
BK 6
Right Turn
BK BK 3 See Fairing
Harness W 5 See Main
Headlamp and DOM BN BN 2
R 4 Harness
BE BE 1 BK 3
[38A] Running Lamp (2 of 4)
W 2
R 1
A
Low [22B-2]
B See Fairing
High
C Harness W/GY 1
Position
D
R/O 1
BK/GN 2
[31LB] W/R 3
W/BK 4
GY/BK 4
BK
W
BK BK 3 See Fairing [22B-1]
Left Turn V V 2 Harness [206B] 1 2 See Fairing
and DOM BE BE 1 Harness
Running Lamp [206A] 1 2
[24B]
BK/W
BK/W
GY/BK
W/BK 4
[73LB] W/R 3
BK BK/GN 2
R/O 1
Clutch
Left Switch
R 1
Auxiliary
Lamp BK 2
BK/W
BK/W
BK
R
[189A]
P&A Power
Ground
P&A Power
Ground
Heated
Hand Grips
BK
BK
(If Equipped)
W/BK 4 4 Can Low

W/R 3 3 Can High
BK/GN 2 2 Ground
R/O 1 1 Battery Fuse
[24D] [24C]
LHCM
Figure A-3. Front Lighting and Hand Controls: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-5
Front Lighting and Hand Controls: 2017 FLHXSE Front Lighting and Hand Controls: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-6
et00844 Right Front
Tweeter/Mid Voltmeter
Right Front
HD-Link Output
Woofer
Battery Fuse
See Front Lighting and
Ground
Hand Controls
Hidden Front Power P&A Accessory
See Main Harness 1 of 4 Antenna Outlet Power A B D [111A]
[22A-1] 1 2 3 4 1 [22A-2] 1 2 3 4 [31RA] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 [1A] 1 2 [193A] 1 2 [132C] 1 2 [299A] A B D [111B]
[34B-2] [34B-2]
W/GY
W/GY
W/R
W/R
2 1
W/BK
W/BK
TN/W
W/Y
BE/W
R/O
BK/GN
R/O
BK/GN
BK/GN
BE/O
BE/O
R/PK
V/BE
BE/BK
BE/Y
BE/PK
BE/BK
V/BE
BK
BE
BK
BE
BK
BK
V/W
BK/GN
R/O
V/BE
BK
A B [34TA]
PK/BK
PK
A B [34TB]
1 2 [132B]
PK/BK
PK
2 1 [34A-1] 1 2 [132A]
2 1 [34B-1]
V/BE
BK
BN/GN
BN/R
[149B-1] [149A-1]
PK/O 1 1 Left Tweeter/Mid Out +

PK/GY 2 2 Left Tweeter/Mid Out -
PK 3 3 Right Tweeter/Mid Out +
PK/BK 4 4 Right Tweeter/Mid Out -
BN/GY 5 5 Left Woofer Out -
BN/O 6 6 Left Woofer Out +
BN/R 7 7 Right Woofer Out +
BN/GN 8 8 Right Woofer Out -
R/PK 9 9 Amp Power
BK 10 10 Ground Front
W/R 11 11 CAN High AMP
R/PK 16 16 Amp Power
BK 17 17 Ground
W/BK 18 18 CAN Low
V/BE 19 19 Accessory -
PK/GY 20 20 Left In -
PK/O 21 21 Left In +
[38B] PK 22 22 Right In +
PK/BK 23 23 Right In -
A BK
See Front B BE/Y
Lighting and
Hand Controls C BE/W
D BE
[39B] [39A]
V/W 1 1 HD-Link Output

W/R 2 2 CAN High
R/O 5 5 Battery Fuse

IM
BK/GN 6 6 Electronic Lock Input
BK/GN 7 7 Ground
W/BK 8 8 CAN Low
W/Y 9 9 Fuel Level
TN/W 10 10 Dash Switch Back Light
BN/GY
BN/O
PK/GN
BK/PK
PK/BE
BK/GN
PK/GY
BK/W
PK/O
V/W
R/O
BK
R
V/BE
[35B-1] 2 1
BK
[53B] 1 2 3 4 5 6 [35TB] A B A B D [117B]
[35A-1] 2 1
BK/GN
PK/GN
PK/GY
BE/PK
BE/BK
BK/PK
PK/BK
PK/BE
[53A] 1 2 3 4 5 6 [35TA] [117A]

W/BK
BK/W
A B A B D
PK/O
V/BE
V/BE
[189B] 2 1
W/R
R/O
BE
BK
BK
BK
BK
PK
PK/BK
HD-Link Output
Ground
Battery Fuse
R
See Front
PK/GN
PK
PK/BE
BK/W
BK
BK
R
[24A] 1 2 3 4 [31LA] 1 2 3 4 [299A-2] 1 2 [2A] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Lighting and
Hand Controls
P&A See Main Harness 1 of 4 [35B-2] 2 1 [35B-2]
Accessory
See Front Lighting and Power
TAB
2 5 6 3 4 1
Hand Controls [225B]
CAV CIR DESCRIPTION Fuel Gauge
1 BK MICROPHONE, COMMON (-)
2 BK HEADSET, COMMON (-)
3 PK/BE HEADSET, RT FRONT (+)
4 R MICROPHONE, FRONT (+)
5 PK/GN HEADSET, LT FRONT (+)
Left Front 6 BK JUMPER Left Front

Woofer Rider Headset 7
TAB SHIELD
N/C
MICROPHONE, SHIELD
Tweeter/Mid
Figure A-4. Fairing Harness: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-7
Fairing Harness: 2017 FLHXSE Fairing Harness: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-8
et00845 CB Module ET
See Radio Horn
CB, Audio (+)

Sensor
CB, Audio (-)

Mic Out (+)
(2 of 2)
Mic Out (-)
CAN High
CAN Low
Engine Temperature
Ground
[162A]
Horn Power
1 2 3 4
Power
5V Sensor Ground
Front WSS
Terminating Fork Lock
Ground
LBE/GY
LBE/O
LBE/BK
LBE
Front WSS High
Switch
Front WSS Low

For Audio See Radio (2 of) Resistor
BK/GN
For Power Locks See Main Harness (4 of 4) [213KB]
R/O
Y/O
Y/V
A B C D
BK
W
R
Y
P&A Audio [298A]
120 [122A-2] 1 1 [122A-1]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20
V/GN
TN/O
TN/R
V/BN
[280A] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 [122B-2] 1 1 [122B-1]
[184B]
W/R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
W/BK
PK/GN
PK/GN
W/R
W/BK
R/Y
PK/BN
LBE/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R
LBE/R
TN/O
BK
BK
TN/R
R
R
A B [90B]
R/W
PK/GN
LBE/W
PK/BE
BK/PK
V/BE
BK
BK
R
LBE/BN
LBE/V
[184A]
R/V
BK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 [319A] A B
A B [90A]
BK
R
[319B]
W/BN
W/PK
B
W
A
R/BE
BK/Y
BK
BK
BK
R
Shield
BK/W
GN
[167A] A B
W/R
W/BK
Radio [167B] A B
O/BE
O/BK
CAN High A1 A1 W/R
TN/R
CAN Low A2 A2 W/BK TN/O
See Main
AUX CAN Low A3 A3 W/BN R
Harness
R/PK
4 of 4
AUX CAN High A4 A4 W/PK
Ground B1 B1 BK
Microphone Front (+) C1 C1 R
Microphone Common (-) C2 C2 BK
Microphone Sum Out (+) C3 C3 R
Microphone Rear (+) D1 D1 R/W
Microphone Shield D2 D2 BK/W
Microphone Sum Out (-) D3 D3 BK GN
Headset Left Rear (+) E1 E1 LBE/W BK/W
Headset Right Rear (+) E2 E2 W/Y
LBE/V
W/V
Headset Common (-) E3 E3 BK/PK
W/R
Headset Left Front (+) F1 F1 PK/GN W/BK
Headset Right Front (+) F2 F2 PK/BE BK/GN See Main
R/GN Harness
External AMP Power Control F4 F4 LBE/BN
BN/Y 2 of 4
Speaker Left Rear (-) H1 H1 LBE/GY
GY/BE
Audio In 1 Right (+) H2 H2 R GN/BE
Audio In 1 Shield/Mono (-) H3 H3 BK R/O
Speaker Left Rear (+) J1 J1 LBE/O BK
Audio In 1 Left/Mono (+) J2 J2 W BK
Audio In 3 Left/Mono (+) J3 J3 W
Speker Right Rear (+) K1 K1 LBE
Speker Right Rear (-) K2 K2 LBE/BK
Audio In 3 Right (+) K3 K3 R
BE
Audio In 3 Shield/Mono (-) K4 K4 BK/Y V/BE
Speaker Left Front (-) L1 L1 PK/GY R/V
Speaker Left Front (+) L2 L2 PK/O LBE/GN
Ground L3 L3 BK BE/GY
Ground L4 L4 BK R/Y
Speaker Right Front (+) M1 M1 PK V/GN See Main
Speaker Right Front (-) M2 M2 PK/BK
R/BE Harness
Radio Fuse M3 M3 R/PK
V/BN 3 of 4
W/GY
Radio Fuse M4 M4 R/PK
BE/W
BE/Y
[27A] [27B] BE/O
BE/PK
BE/BK
R
BK
LBE/GN
BK/GN
LBE/W
BE/GY
LBE/Y
BK/GN
LBE/W
BK/GN
BK/GN
GN/BE
BE/PK
BE/BK
GY/BE
LBE/Y
TN/W
BN/Y
V/BE
O/BN
O/PK
W/GY
W/BK
TN/W
W/BK
BE/W
BK/W
O/BN
O/BE
O/PK
O/BK
BE/O
R/GN
PK/GN
R/PK
PK/GY
V/BE
BE/Y
BK/PK
PK/BE
PK/BK
BK
W/R
W/R
W/Y
W/V
[GND3B]
BK/W
R/O
PK/O
1
V/BE
BK
BK
BK
BE
BK
R
BK
BK
PK
R
[GND3A] 1 [105LB] [200B]

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 [1B] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 1 9 10 14 15 17 18 23 24 26 [166B] A B [168B] 1 2 [107B] 2 3 4 5 6 [105RB] A B C [83B]
[2B] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
[105LA] 1 2 3 4 5 6 [200A] 1 2 3 [168A]
BK
1 9 10 14 15 17 18 23 24 26 [166A] A B [107A] 2 3 4 5 6 [105RA] A B C [83A]

See Fairing 1 2
See Fairing
Chassis Cooling Fan
P&A Accy 2
Auxiliary Lamp Switch
Ground
P&A Relay Power
Switch Back Lamp
Electronic Lock Input

Unlock Input
Lock Input
Battery Power (Motor)

Ground
CAN Low
Rear WSS -
Battery Power (Solenoids)

Front WSS +
CAN High
Rear WSS +
Front WSS -
Ground (ECU)
Harness Harness
5V Sensor Ground
Unlock Output
Lock Output
Ground
P&A Relay Power
Switch Back Lamp
Rear Ignition Coil

System Power
Front Ignition Coil
Ait Temperature
BK
R
BK
Rear WSS High

Rear WSS Low
BK
BK
AAT Sensor Dash Ignition

GND 3-1 GND 3-2 Dash Resistor Rear WSS Switch Pack Coil
Switch Pack Pack ABS ECU
Figure A-5. Main Harness (1 of 4): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-9
Main Harness (1 of 4): 2017 FLHXSE Main Harness (1 of 4): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-10
94000390
et00846
[203FA]
[203FB]
(1 of 4)
Harness
See Main
1
1
V/GN System Power

2
2
ACR
ACR Enable
Front
LGN/R
BK
BK
[78A-1]
[78B-1]
GN
R/O
W/V
W/Y
W/R
BN/Y
R/GN
W/BK
BK/W
ECM
GY/BE
GN/BE
BK/GN
Rear Ignition Coil GY/BE
[84B]
[84A]
Front Ignition Coil GN/BE

Front HO2S Ground BK/O
A
A
R/GN System Power

VSS LGN/Y
B
B
Front Fuel Injector GN/Y GN/Y Front Injector

Front
Rear Fuel Injector GY/Y

Fuel Injector
MAP Input GY
JSS LGN/GY
[211B]
[211A]
Chassis Cooling Fan Switch BN/Y
(BK)
Ground BK/GN
CAN Low W/BK GY/O ETC Low
CAN High W/R BK/W 5V Sensor Ground 1
Rear HO2S Ground BK/PK GN/V TPS 1
R/W 5V Sensor Power 1
TCA
CKP Sensor High R

GY/V TPS 2
Front HO2S
A B C D E F
A B C D E F
GN/BN GN/O ETC High

CKP Sensor Low
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 18
BK
[80B]
[80A]
[78A-2]
[78B-2]
BK/GY 5V Sensor Ground 2
GN/GY IAT
Chassis Cooling Fan Control V/BK R/GY 5V Sensor Power 2
TMAP
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
Sensor
Front Knock Sensor HI BN/W GY MAP Input

Cooling Fan Relay Control BN/BK
ACR Enable LGN/R
Purge Solenoid LGN/BK
IAT GN/GY
[315B]
[315A]
5V Sensor Ground 1 BK/W

ET GN
1
1
5V Sensor Power 1 R/W LGN/W Knock Sensor LO

2
2
Ground BK/GN BN/W Knock Sensor HI

Front
Front Knock Sensor LO LGN/W
(GY)
Knock Sensor
Rear Knock Sensor HI BN/V

Rear Knock Sensor LO LGN/V
[316B]
[316A]
TPS 2 GY/V
System Power R/GN
1
1
LGN/V Knock Sensor LO

Rear HO2S GY/BN
2
2
Rear
Battery Fuse BN/V Knock Sensor HI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18
R/O
Knock Sensor
[85B]
[85A]
[78A-3]
[78B-3]
A
A
R/GN System Power

Cooling Fan Left GN/BK
B
B
Rear Injector
Rear
GY/Y
TPS 1 GN/V
Fuel Injector
AAT W/V
Cooling Fan Right GY/BK
ETC High GN/O
[203RB]
[203RA]
ETC Low GY/O

Ground BK/GN
1
1
Oil Pressure Sensor W/O V/GN System Power
(BN)
TGS 1
2
2
GN/W
ACR
ACR Enable
Rear
LGN/R
TGS 2 GY/W
Coolant Temperature GY/GN
[95B]
[95A]
5V Sensor Ground 2 BK/GY

5V Sensore Power 2
1 2 3 5 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18
1 2 3 5 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 18
R/GY
A
A
V/GN System Power

B
B
LGN/BK Purge Solenoid

Purge
Solenoid
[191B]
[191A]
[215B]
[215A]
[232LB]
[232LA]
3
3
GN/BK GN/BK V/BE P&A Power

1 2
1 2
Fan
B A
B A
BN/BE BN/BE
4
4
Seat
Cooling
BK Ground
Heated
GY/GN GY/GN
3 4
3 4
A B
A B
BK/W BK/W
Left ECT
[13A]
[13B]
[141B]
BK
[236A]
[236B]
R/BN R/BN W/Y

BK W/Y W/Y R/BN
BK/GN BK/GN BK/GN
BK
A B C D
BK BK BK
R/Y R
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
BK/GN BK BK
Fuel Level Sender
GND 2 GND 1
BK/GN
BK R
B A
BK
Light
Fuel Pump and LED Console
[318A]
[318B]
A
A
Starter Solenoid Power

[232RA]
[232RB]
[97A]
V/BK
B
B
Starter Solenoid Power BN/BE

Chassis
1
1
GY/BK GY/BK
Cooling Fan
(If Equipped)
2
2
B A
Right
BN/BE BN/BE
[131A-2]
[131B-2]
BN/BE Cooling Relay Power

BN/BK Cooling Pump Control
1
1
1 2 3
1 2 3
Cooling Fan Pump
BK BK Ground
Cooling
Switch
Neutral
1
1
W
[235B]
[235A]
R/W R 5V Sensor Power 1

GN/W W TGS 1
[131A-1]
[131B-1]
BK/W BK 5V Sensor Ground 1

5V Sensor Power 2
TGS
R/GY R
1
1
Starter Solenoid Power R/BK GY/W W TGS 2

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
BK/GY BK 5V Sensor Ground 2

Starter
[128A]
[128B]
[204A]
[204B]
R
R
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
V/BE
BK/PK
W
R/BK
R/Y
R/BN
BK/O
V/GN
R/O
BK/GN
LGN/GY
GY/BN
R/GN
GN/BN
BK/W
W/BK
W/R
R/W
W/O
5V Sensor Power R/W

1
1
VSS Input LGN/Y R Security Antenna High

VSS
A B C
A B C
Ground BK/GN
2
2
BK Security Antenna Low

Security
Antenna
(4 of 4)
(3 of 4)
Harness
Harness
See Main
See Main
[65A]
[65B]
[209B]
[209A]
A-11
94000390 A-12
94000390
et00847
(2 of 4)
Harness
(1 of 4)
See Main
Harness
See Main
R
R
R
BE
BK
BK
BK
BK
R/Y
R/V
R/Y
R/O
W/R
R/W
W/O
BE/Y
V/BE
V/BN
R/BE
R/BK
BE/O
R/BN
BK/O
V/GN
V/GN
R/GN
BE/W
W/BK
BK/W
W/GY
BE/BK
BE/PK
BK/PK
BE/GY
BK/GN
GY/BN
GN/BN
LBE/GN
LGN/GY
[138A]
[138B]
System
1
1
V/GN VPower
Front O2
2
2
BK/O W
Heater Ground
3
3
GN/BN GY Front O2
Sensor
[121A-1]
[121B-1]
HO2S Front
4
4
BK/W BK 5V Sensor
Ground
1
1
BE/GN
RF Antenna
Rear
Brake
Switch
1
1
[137A]
[137B]
BK
System
1
1
V/GN VPower
2
2
BK/PK W Rear O2
Heater Ground
[121A-2]
[121B-2]
3
3
GY/BN GY Rear O2
Sensor
HO2S Rear
4
4
BK/W BK 5V Sensor
Ground
[139A]
[139B]
Voltage
Regulator
[77B]
[77A]
[47A]
[47B]
5V Sensor Ground BK/W

Stator
5V Sensor Power R/W

N
N
BK
1 2 3
1 2 3
Oil Pressure Input W/O
Sender
1 2 3
1 2 3
P
P
Oil Pressure
[133B]
[133A]
R/W R 5V Sensor Power

LGN/GY W JSS Signal
JSS
1 2 3
1 2 3
BK/GN BK Sensor Ground

(If Equipped)
[259A]
[259B]
[79B]
[79A]
1
1
R
1
1
R CKP Sensor High

BK
2
2
CKP
BK CKP Sensor Low

Sensor
Security Antenna (+) R

Start Enable W/BN
RF Antenna BK
Security Antenna (-) BK
[7A]
AUX Lamp Switch BE/GY

Fork Lock V/BN
Run/Stop Switch input W/GY R/Y
CAN High W/R BE/BN
BE
Neutral Switch input W BE/R
CAN Low
Lighting
W/BK BE/V
See Rear
1 2 3 4 5 6
Horn Power R/V BK

Brake Switch Input BE/GN
Fuel Pump Power R/BN
BCM
Unlock Signal TN/GY

Ground BK/GN
Security Siren W/GN

Lock Signal TN/BE
Front Right Turn Signal BE/O
Running/Position Light Power BE
Front Left Turn Signal BE/PK
Rear Right Turn Signal BE/BN
Brake Light Power BE/R
Rear Left Turn Signal BE/V
Starter Solenoid Power R/BK
System Power R/GN
AUX Lamp Power BE/BK
Accessory Power
[142B]
[142A]
R/Y
High Beam Power BE/W
Low Beam Power BE/Y R/O Power
A2 A3 A4 B2 B3 C2 C4 D2 D3 E2 E4 F3 F4 G3 G4 H2 H4 J2 J3 J4 K2 K3 K4 L2 L3 L4 M2 M3 M4
A2 A3 A4 B2 B3 C2 C4 D2 D3 E2 E4 F3 F4 G3 G4 H2 H4 J2 J3 J4 K2 K3 K4 L2 L3 L4 M2 M3 M4
W/GN Security Siren

1 2 3
1 2 3
Siren
BK Ground
Security
[242A]
[242B]
[91A]
W/R
BK
W/BK
DLC
R/Y
1 2 3 5 6
W/BN
V/BE
1 4
BK
P&A
[4A]
Accessory
LBE/GN
1 4
Aux
BK
[325B]
Devices
R/BE
R
R
V/BE
TN/BE
R/Y
R/BE
TN/GY
V/GN
R/O
R/GN
R
BK
2
1
[281B]
(4 of 4)
Harness
See Main
Tender
Battery
A-13
94000390 A-14
et00848
[214B-2] [214A-2] See Main

Harness
TN/R 3 5 87 (1 of 4)
BK 4 4 87A
R/BE 5 3 30 Unlock [298B] 10 11
BK 2 1 85 Relay
TN/GY 1 2 86 [298A] 10 11
TN/O
TN/R
[214B-1] [214A-1]
TN/O 3 5 87
BK 4 4 87A
R/BE 5 3 30 Lock
BK 2 1 85
Relay
TN/BE 1 2 86
TN/R
See Main TN/O
Harness R
(1 of 4)
R/PK
Fuse Block
5A Battery [64B]
R/O 2 1 R
7.5A
System Power
R/GN 4 3 V/GN
20A Radio
TN/GY R/PK 6 5 R
TN/BE
20A P&A
R/O R/BE 12 11 R
See Main R/GN
5A Spare
Harness R/BE
(3 of 4) V/BE 8 7 BK
R/Y 7.5A Spare
V/GN 14 13 BK
R
20A Rear Amp
R 20 19 R
TN/O
TN/O
TN/R
TN/R
10A Cooling
BN 10 9 R
P&A Relay [288B] 9 18 [289B] 3 6
V/BE 24 5 87 [288A] 9 18 [289A] 3 6
TN/O
TN/O
TN/R
TN/R
R/BE 17 3 30
R/Y 18 1 85
BK 23 2 86
Cooling Relay
BN/BE 22 5 87
BN 15 3 30
See Main V/BE R/GN 16 1 85
Harness BN/BE BK 21 2 86
(2 of 4) BK
TN/O
TN/O
TN/R
TN/R
[213LB] 1 2 [213RB] 1 2
Red [213LA] 1 2 [213RA] 1 2
Band
BK
BK
Lock Power
Unlock Power
Lock Power
Unlock Power
BK
[5B] A B
BK
R
BK
Battery Starter 50A Left Right

Main Fuse Saddlebag Saddlebag
Lock Lock
Transmission
94000390 A-15
94000390 A-16
et00851
Canada DOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 [7B] 2 3 4 5 6 [7B]
R/Y
BE/BN
BE/R
BE/BN
BE/R
BE/V
BE/V
BE
BK
BE
BK
BE/BN
BE/BN
BE/R
BE/R
BE/R
BE/R
BE/R
BE/V
BE/V
R/Y
BK
BE
BK
BE
BE
BK
BK
BE
BK
BE
BE
BK
BK
BE
1 2 3 4 [18B] 6 4 3 1 [94B] 1 2 [45A] 1 2 3 4 [19B] 1 2 3 4 [18B] 1 2 [45A] 1 2 3 4 [19B]
1 2 3 4 [18A] 6 5 4 3 2 1 [94A] 1 2 [45B] 1 2 3 4 [19A] 1 2 3 4 [18A] 1 2 [45B] 1 2 3 4 [19A]
Brake
Ground
Running
Brake
Ground
Running
Brake
Ground
Running
Brake
Ground
Running
Left Turn
Right Turn
Left Turn
Right Turn
BK
BK
BK
BK
1 [19A]
2
Power
Ground
Power
Ground
Left STT Right STT Left STT Right STT
1 [18A]
2
LP LP
4 4
1 3 3 R/Y
2 2 2 BE
3 1 1 BK
[93A] [93B]
R/Y
BE
BK
A B C [93B-2]
Running
Brake
Ground
LED Tail
Lamp
Figure A-9. Rear Lighting: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-17
Rear Lighting: 2017 FLHXSE Rear Lighting: 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-18
et00849 CB
CB, Audio (+)

Module
CB, Audio (-)

See Radio (2 of 2)
Mic Out (+)

Mic Out (-)
CAN High
CAN Low
Ground
Power
[162A] 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 [298A]
PK/GN
PK/GN
W/R
W/BK
R/Y
PK/BN
LBE/GN
PK/BN
LBE/GN
LBE/R
LBE/R
BK
BK
R
R
LBE/O
LBE/GY
LBE/BK
LBE
BK/GN
R/O
Y/O
Y/V
BK
W
R
Y
P&A Audio [35B-1] [35A-1]
[280A] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 [184B] BN/GY 2 2 PK/BK 2 Left Front
R/W
PK/GN
LBE/W
PK/BE
BK/PK
V/BE
BK
BK
R
LBE/BN
LBE/V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 [184A] BN/O 1 1 PK 1 Woofer
[27A] [27B]
W/BN
W/PK
W
R/BE
BK/Y
BK
BK
BK
R
R
Radio [35B-2] [35A-2]
CAN High A1 A1 W/R
CAN Low A2 A2 W/BK [35TB] [35TA]
AUX CAN Low A3 A3 W/BN
AUX CAN High A4 A4 W/PK PK/O A A Left Front
Ground B1 B1 BK PK/GY B B Tweeter/Mid
Front Microphone (+) C1 C1 R
Microphone Common (-) C2 C2 BK
Microphone Sum Out (+) C3 C3 R
Rear Microphone (+) D1 D1 R/W
Microphone Shield D2 D2 BK/W [1B] [1A]
Microphone Sum Out (-) D3 D3 BK
Left Rear Headset (+) E1 E1 LBE/W W/R 2 2 W/R
Right Rear Headset (+) E2 E2 LBE/V W/BK 3 3 W/BK
Headset Common (-) E3 E3 BK/PK BK 6 6 BK
BK 14 14 BK
Left Front Headset (+) F1 F1 PK/GN [149B-1] [149A-1]
R/PK 15 15 R/PK AMP
Right Front Headset (+) F2 F2 PK/BE
External AMP Power Control F4 F4 LBE/BN PK/O 1 1 Left Tweeter/Mid Out +
PK/GY 2 2 Left Tweeter/Mid Out -
Left Rear Speaker (-) H1 H1 LBE/GY
[2B] [2A] PK 3 3 Right Tweeter/Mid Out +
Audio In 1 Right (+) H2 H2 R PK/BK 4 4 Right Tweeter/Mid Out -
Audio In 1 Shield/Mono (-) H3 H3 BK
PK/GN 1 1 PK/GN BN/GY 5 5 Left Woofer Out -
Left Rear Speaker (+) J1 J1 LBE/O BN/O 6 6 Left Woofer Out +
V/BE 2 2 V/BE
Audio In 1 Left/Mono (+) J2 J2 W 3 3 BN/R 7 7 Right Woofer Out +
Audio In 3 Left/Mono (+) J3 J3 W BK/PK 4 4 BK/PK BN/GN 8 8 Right Woofer Out -
Right Rear Speaker (+) K1 K1 LBE PK/BE 5 5 PK/BE R/PK 9 9 Amp Power
R 6 6 R BK 10 10 Ground
Right Rear Speaker (-) K2 K2 LBE/BK
BK 7 7 BK W/R 11 11 CAN High
Audio In 3 Right (+) K3 K3 R BK/W 8 8 BK/W R/PK 16 16 Amp Power
Audio In 3 Shield/Mono (-) K4 K4 BK/Y PK 9 9 PK BK 17 17 Ground
Left Front Speaker (-) L1 L1 PK/GY PK/BK 10 10 PK/BK W/BK 18 18 CAN Low
Left Front Speaker (+) L2 L2 PK/O PK/O 11 11 PK/O V/BE 19 19 Accessory Power
Ground L3 L3 BK PK/GY 12 12 PK/GY PK/GY 20 20 Left In -
Ground L4 L4 BK PK/O 21 21 Left In +
Fuse Block PK 22 22 Right In +
Right Front Speaker (+) M1 M1 PK
PK/BK 23 23 Right In -
Right Front Speaker (-) M2 M2 PK/BK 20A Radio
Radio Fuse M3 M3 R/PK R/PK 6 5 R
[34TB] [34TA]
Radio Fuse M4 M4 R/PK 20A P&A
R/BE 12 11 R
PK A A Right Front
20A Rear Amp
PK/BK B B Tweeter/Mid
R 6 5 R
P&A Relay
V/BE 24 5 87
[34B-1] [34A-1]
R/BE 17 3 30
R/Y 18 1 85 BN/GN 2 2 PK/BK 2
BK 23 2 86
Right Front
W/BK
1 1 PK Woofer
W/R
BN/R 1
[64B]
To Main Harness [34B-2] [34A-2]
R/Y
BK
Red Band
[242B] M2 1 [GND3-B] [225B]
BK
R
[242A] M2 1 [GND3-A] [53A] [53B] Rider
R
[5B]
BK
A B 2 Headset
Accessory Power
BK
BK
CAV CIR DESCRIPTION
BK
PK/GN 1 1 PK/GN 5 1 BK MICROPHONE, COMMON (-)

BK
BK
HEADSET, COMMON (-)

BK
2 BK
BK/PK 2 2 BK 6 3 PK/BE HEADSET, RT FRONT (+)
GND 2 PK/BE 3 3 PK/BE 3 4 R MICROPHONE, FRONT (+)

5 PK/GN HEADSET, LT FRONT (+)
R 4 4 R 4 6 BK JUMPER
BK 5 5 BK 1 N/C
Starter 7
TAB SHIELD MICROPHONE, SHIELD
50A BK/W 6 6 BK/W TAB
BCM GND 3-2 GND 3-1 GND 1 Battery Main Fuse
Figure A-10. Radio (1 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-19
Radio (1 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE Radio (1 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-20
et00850
[149B-2] [149A-2]
PK/Y 1 1 Left Tweeter/Mid Out +

PK/BE 2 2 Left Tweeter/Mid Out -
PK/BN 3 3 Right Tweeter/Mid Out +
PK/GN 4 4 Right Tweeter/Mid Out -
LBE/PK 5 5 Left Woofer Out -
[288B] [288A]
LBE/Y 6 6 Left Woofer Out +
LBE/R 7 7 Right Woofer Out +
W/R 1 1 W/R LBE/GN 8 8 Right Woofer Out -
PK/BN 2 2 PK/BN R 9 9 Amp Power
LBE/O 3 3 LBE/O
4 4
BK 10 10 Ground Rear
LBE LBE
LBE/R 5 5 LBE/R W/R 11 11 CAN High Amp
[162A] [162B] R/Y 6 6 R/Y BK 12 12 Ground
R 7 7 R R 16 16 Amp Power
1 1 W/R R 8 8 R BK 17 17 Ground
2 2 W/BK W/BK 10 10 W/BK W/BK 18 18 CAN Low
3 3 R PK/GN 11 11 PK/GN R/Y 19 19 Accessory -
4 4 R LBE/GY 20 20 Left In -
LBE/GY 12 12 LBE/GY
5 5 R/Y LBE/O 21 21 Left In +
LBE/BK 13 13 LBE/BK 22 22 Right In +
PK/BN 6 6 PK/BN LBE
LBE/GN 14 14 LBE/GN LBE/BK 23 23 Right In -
7 7 W/R
8 8 W/BK BK 16 16 BK
PK/GN 9 9 PK/GN BK 17 17 BK
See Radio
(1 of 2) 12 12 BK
13 13 BK
LBE/R 14 14 LBE/R
LBE/GN 15 15 LBE/GN
PK/GN 17 17 PK/GN [42WB] [42WA]
PK/BN 18 18 PK/BN
LBE/GN 19 19 LBE/GN LBE/Y A Left Rear
LBE/R 20 20 LBE/R LBE/PK B Woofer
[42TB] [42TA]
[298B] [298A] PK/Y A A Left Rear

PK/BE B B Tweeter/Mid
PK/GN 5 5 PK/GN
LBE/GN 4 4 LBE/GN
PK/BN 2 2 PK/BN
[41WB] [41WA]
LBE/R 1 1 LBE/R
LBE/R A Right Rear

LBE/GN B Woofer
[162A] [162B] [41TB] [41TA]
1 1 LBE/O PK/BN A A Right Rear

See Radio 2 2 LBE/GY PK/GN B B Tweeter/Mid
(1 of 2) 3 3 LBE
4 4 LBE/BK
Figure A-11. Radio (2 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-21
Radio (2 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE Radio (2 of 2): 2017 FLHXSE
94000390 A-22
CONNECTOR END VIEWS A.3
CONNECTOR END VIEWS ed03661
1 2 3 4 5 6
Table A-3. Main to Interconnect Harness [1] 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 8 9 10 11 12
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 12 11 10 9 8 7
1 W/GY Run/stop switch input

2 W/R CAN high [B] [A]
3 W/BK CAN low Figure A-13. Main to Interconnect Harness [2]

4 R/O Battery fuse
Table A-5. Fuel Tank Harness [13]
5 BK/GN Ground
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6 BK Ground
1 R/BN Fuel pump power
7 W/Y Fuel level
2 W/Y Fuel level
8 BE/W High beam headlamp
3 BK/GN Ground
9 BE/Y Low beam headlamp
4 BK Ground
10 BE Running lights power
5 R/Y Accessory power
11 BE/O Right front turn signal
6 BK Ground
12 BE/PK Left front turn signal
13 BE/BK Auxiliary lamp power ed03649
14 BK Ground 1 2 3
3 2 1
15 R/BK Amp power
4 5 6
6 5 4
16 - N/C
ed03647
[B] [A]
Figure A-14. Fuel Tank Harness [13]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table A-6. Left STT [18]

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

[B] [A] 1 BE/R Brake lamp power
Figure A-12. Main to Interconnect Harness [1] 2 BK Ground

3 BE/V Left rear turn signal
Table A-4. Main to Interconnect Harness [2]
1 PK/GN Headset, left front (+) ed03597
2 V/BE P&A relay power

3 BK Ground 1 4
4 BK/PK Headset, common (-)
2 3
5 PK/BE Headset, right front (+)
6 R Microphone, front (+)
7 BK Microphone, common (-) Figure A-15. Left STT [18]
8 Shield Microphone, shield Table A-7. Right STT [19]

9 PK Speaker right front (+) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
10 PK/BK Speaker right front (-) 1 BE/R Brake lamp power
11 PK/O Speaker left front (+) 2 BK Ground
12 PK/GY Speaker left front (-) 3 BE/BN Right rear turn signal
94000390 A-23
ed03597 ed03677
1 4 1 2
2 1
2 3
[B] [A]
Figure A-16. Right STT [19] Figure A-20. Left Front Woofer [35W]
Table A-8. Right Front Tweeter/Midrange Speaker [34T] Table A-12. Right Saddlebag Tweeter/Midrange Speaker
[41T]
A PK Right front tweeter/mid (+) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A LBE/O Right rear tweeter/mid (+)
B PK/BK Right front tweeter/mid (-)
B LBE Right rear tweeter/mid (-)
ed03678
ed03664
A B
A B
Figure A-17. Right Front Tweeter/Midrange Speaker [34T]

Figure A-21. Right Saddlebag Tweeter/Midrange Speaker
Table A-9. Right Front Woofer [34W] [41T]
Table A-13. Right Saddlebag Woofer [41W]
1 BN/R Right front woofer (+)
2 BN/GN Right front woofer (-)
A W/R Right rear woofer (+)
B LBE/Y Right rear woofer (-)
ed03677
ed03678
1 2
2 1
A B
[B] [A]
Figure A-18. Right Front Woofer [34W]
Table A-10. Left Front Tweeter/Midrange Speaker [35T] Figure A-22. Right Saddlebag Woofer [41W]
Table A-14. Left Saddlebag Tweeter/Midrange Speaker
A PK/O Left front tweeter/mid (+) [42T]
B PK/GY Left front tweeter/mid (-) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A LBE/Y Left rear tweeter/mid (+)
ed03678
B LBE/GY Left rear tweeter/mid (-)
ed03664
A B
A B
Figure A-19. Left Front Tweeter/Midrange Speaker [35T]
Table A-11. Left Front Woofer [35W]

Figure A-23. Left Saddlebag Tweeter/Midrange Speaker
[42T]
1 BN/O Left front woofer (+)
2 BN/GY Left front woofer (-)
A-24 94000390
Table A-15. Left Saddlebag Woofer [42W]
ed03649

1 2 3
3 2 1
A BN/O Left rear woofer (+)
4 5 6
B BN/GY Left rear woofer (-) 6 5 4
ed03678 [B] [A]
Figure A-27. Rider Headset [53]
A B
Table A-19. Audio Amplifier Front [149-1]
1 PK/O Left front tweeter/mid out +
Figure A-24. Left Saddlebag Woofer [42W] 2 PK/GY Left front tweeter/mid out -
3 PK Right front tweeter/mid out +
Table A-16. Rear Amp Fuse [43]
4 PK/BK Right front tweeter/mid out -
5 BN/GY Left front woofer out +
A R Amp power
6 BN/O Left front woofer out -
B R Battery
7 BN/R Right front woofer out +
8 BN/GN Right front woofer out -
ed03819
9 R/PK Amp power
10 BK Ground
B A 11 W/R CAN +
12 - N/C
13 - N/C
Figure A-25. Rear Amp Fuse [43] 14 - N/C
Table A-17. LP Lamp [45] 15 - N/C

16 R/PK Amp power
17 BK Ground
1 BE LP lamp power
18 W/BK CAN -
2 BK Ground
ed03721 20 PK/GY Left in (-)
21 PK/O Left in (+)
1 2
22 PK Right in (+)
23 PK/BK Right in (-)
ed03658
Figure A-26. LP Lamp [45]

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table A-18. Rider Headset [53]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1 PK/GN Headset, left front (+)
2 BK Headset, common (-) Figure A-28. Audio Amplifier Front [149-1]
Table A-20. Audio Amplifier Rear [149-2]
5 BK Microphone, common (-)
1 LBE/Y Left rear tweeter/mid out +
6 Shield Microphone, shield
2 LBE/GY Left rear tweeter/mid out -
3 LBE/Y Right rear tweeter/mid out +
4 LBE/GY Right rear tweeter/mid out -
5 BN/GY Left rear woofer out +
94000390 A-25
Table A-20. Audio Amplifier Rear [149-2] Table A-21. Rear Audio [162A]
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6 BN/O Left rear woofer out - 19 LBE/BK Right woofer -
7 LBE/BN Right rear woofer out + 20 LBE/BN Right woofer +
8 LBE/BK Right rear woofer out -
ed04013
9 R Amp power
10 BK Ground 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 W/R CAN + 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
12 BK Configure 1
13 - N/C [A]
14 - N/C
Figure A-30. Rear Audio [162A]
15 - N/C
Table A-22. Rear Audio [162B]
16 R Amp power
17 BK Ground TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
18 W/BK CAN - 1 W/R CAN +
19 R/Y P&A relay power 2 W/BK CAN -
20 LBE/GY Left rear in (-) 3 R Amp power
21 LBE/O Left rear in (+) 4 R Amp power
22 LBE Right rear in (+) 5 R/Y Accessory power
23 LBE/BK Right rear in (-) 6 LBE/Y Right tweeter/mid +

7 LBE/GY Left in -
ed03658 8 LBE/BK Right in -
9 LBE/BK Right tweeter/mid -
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 LBE/O Left in +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11 LBE Right in +
12 BK Ground
13 BK Ground
Figure A-29. Audio Amplifier Rear [149-2]
14 LBE/BN Right woofer +
Table A-21. Rear Audio [162A] 15 LBE/BK Right woofer -
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 16 - N/C
1 W/R CAN + 17 LBE Right tweeter/mid -
2 W/BK CAN - 18 LBE/O Right tweeter/mid +
3 R Amp power 19 LBE/Y Right woofer -
4 R Amp power 20 W/PK Right woofer +
ed04012
6 LBE/Y Right tweeter/mid +
7 LBE/GY Left in -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8 LBE/BK Right in -
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
9 LBE/BK Right rear tweeter/mid -
10 LBE/O Left in + [B]
11 LBE Right in +
Figure A-31. Rear Audio [162B]
12 BK Ground
Table A-23. XM Antenna [185]
13 BK Ground
14 LBE/BN Right woofer + TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
15 LBE/BK Right woofer - 1 BK Coax cable
16 - N/C
17 LBE/BK Right rear tweeter/mid -
18 LBE/Y Right rear tweeter/mid +
A-26 94000390
Table A-27. Lock Relay [214-1]
ed03711

1 TN/BE Lock signal
1 2 BK Ground
3 TN/O Lock relay power
4 BK Ground
Figure A-32. XM Antenna [185] 5 R/BE P&A fuse
Table A-24. Fork Lock [213]
ed04006 3
A - N/C 5
1 4 2
B - N/C
C V/BN Fork lock
D V/GN System power fuse
Figure A-36. Lock Relay [214-1]
ed03646
Table A-28. Unlock Relay [214-2]
A B C D
1 TN/GY Unlock signal
2 BK Ground
3 TN/R Unlock relay power
Figure A-33. Fork Lock [213] 4 BK Ground
Table A-25. Saddlebag Lock (LH) [213L] 5 R/BE P&A fuse

ed04006 3
1 TN/O Lock relay power
2 TN/R Unlock relay power 5
1 4 2
ed03721
1 2
Figure A-37. Unlock Relay [214-2]
Table A-29. BCM [242]

Figure A-34. Saddlebag Lock (LH) [213L] A1 - N/C
Table A-26. Saddlebag Lock (RH) [213R] A2 R Security antenna high
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A3 W/BN Start enable
1 TN/O Lock relay power A4 BK Security RF antenna
2 TN/R Unlock relay power B1 - N/C

B2 BK Security antenna low
ed03721 B3 BE/GY Aux lamp switch
B4 - N/C
1 2 C1 - N/C
C2 V/BN Fork lock
C3 - N/C
C4 W/GY Engine stop switch input
Figure A-35. Saddlebag Lock (RH) [213R]
D1 - N/C
D2 W/R CAN high
D3 W Neutral switch input
D4 - N/C
94000390 A-27
Table A-29. BCM [242] Table A-30. Rider Headset [225]
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
E1 - N/C 5 PK/GN Headset, left front (+)
E2 W/BK CAN low 6 BK Jumper
E3 W/O Oil pressure switch input 7 - N/C
E4 R/V Horn power Tab Shield Microphone, shield
F1 - N/C
ed03659
F2 - N/C TAB
7 6
F3 BE/GN Brake switch input 3 1
5 4
2
F4 R/BN Fuel pump power
G1 - N/C
G2 - N/C
G3 - N/C
Figure A-39. Rider Headset [225]
G4 BK/GN Ground
Table A-31. LED Console Light [277]
H1 - N/C
H2 W/GN Security siren TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
H3 - N/C 1 R/Y ACC power
H4 - N/C 2 BK Ground
J1 - N/C
ed03698
J2 BE/O Right front turn signal
J3 BE Running/position lights
J4 BE/PK Left front turn signal 2 1
K1 - N/C
K2 BE/BN Right rear turn signal
K3 BE/R Brake lamp power Figure A-40. LED Console Light [277]
K4 BE/V Left rear turn signal
Table A-32. Left Saddlebag [288]
L1 - N/C
L2 R/BK Starter solenoid power
1 W/R CAN +
L3 R/GN System power
2 PK/BN Right tweeter/mid +
L4 BE/BK Front running/fog light power
3 LBE/O Left in +
M1 - N/C
4 LBE Right in +
M2 R/Y Accessory power
5 LBE/R Right woofer +
M3 BE/W High beam power
M4 BE/Y Low beam power
7 R Amp power
ed03681
8 R Amp power
A B C D E F G H J K L M
9 TN/O Lock power
4 4
3 3 10 W/BK CAN -
2 2
1 1 11 PK/GN Right tweeter/mid -

A B C D E F G H J K L M
12 LBE/GY Left in -
13 LBE/BK Right in -
Figure A-38. BCM [242] 14 LBE/GN Right woofer -
Table A-30. Rider Headset [225] 16 BK Ground
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 17 BK Ground
1 PK/GN Microphone, common (-) 18 TN/R Unlock power
2 BK Headset, common (-)

A-28 94000390
ed04055
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 12
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 12
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
[B] [A]
Figure A-41. Left Saddlebag [288]
Table A-33. Right Saddlebag [298]

1 LBE/R Woofer +
2 PK/BN Tweeter/mid +
4 LBE/GN Woofer -
5 PK/GN Tweeter/mid -
ed04056
3 6
6 3
2 5
5 2
1 4
4 1
[B] [A]
Figure A-42. Right Saddlebag [298]
Table A-34. P&A Accessory Power [299-2]

2 BK Ground
ed03677
1 2
2 1
[B] [A]
Figure A-43. P&A Accessory Power [299-2]
94000390 A-29
COMPONENT LOCATION VIEWS A.4
COMPONENT LOCATIONS components and connectors. The figures are generally ordered
from front to back around the motorcycle.
Some components and connectors are not easily located on
the motorcycle. The following figures show locations for these
ed04060
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
33
16
32
17
18
31
30 19
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
1. Power lock resistor pack [200] 18. Left front woofer [35W]
2. Right front tweeter/midrange [34T] 19. Left front turn signal [31L]
3. Voltmeter [111] 20. Front fender tip lamp [32]
4. P&A accessory power [299] 21. Rider headset [53]
5. Radio [27] 22. Main to interconnect harness [2]
6. USB 23. LHCM [24]
7. P&A audio [280] 24. P&A accessory power [299-2]
8. IM [39] 25. Headlamp [38]
9. CB module [185] 26. RHCM [22-2]
10. Antenna [51] 27. RHCM [22-1]
11. GPS antenna [193] 28. Main to interconnect harness [1]
12. XM antenna [185] 29. TGS jumper harness [204]
13. Audio amplifier front [149-1] 30. Right front turn signal [31R]
14. Fuel gauge [117] 31. Right front woofer [34W]
15. Left front tweeter/midrange [35T] 32. Power outlet [132]
16. Left front speaker [35] 33. Right front speaker [34]
17. Rider headset [225]
Figure A-44. Under Fairing
A-30 94000390
ed03848 ed03849
2 3
3
1 4
2 5
4
1
6
6
5
9 8 7
1. Rider headset [225] 1. Rear audio [162]
2. OE dash switch pack [105L] 2. Rear lighting [7]
3. Fork lock [213] 3. Fuel tank harness [13]
4. P&A dash switch pack [105R] 4. Security antenna [209]
5. Fuel pump and fuel level sender [141] 5. Rear amp fuse [43]
6. Console lamp [277] 6. Purge solenoid [95]
Figure A-45. Under Console and Fairing Switches 7. ECM [78-1] (BK)
8. ECM [78-2] (GY)
ed04052 9. ECM [78-3] (BN)
Figure A-47. Under Seat
1
2
6 3
5 4
1. ABS [166]
2. Front HO2S [137] (behind [138])
3. Rear WSS [168]
4. Unlock relay [214-2]
5. Lock relay [214-1]
6. Rear HO2S [138]
Figure A-46. Behind Right Side Cover
94000390 A-31
ed04054
1 2 3 4
5
13
6
12
11 7
10 8

Figure A-48. Rear Audio
A-32 94000390
TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR A.5
TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR REPAIR ed04015

GA500A SNAP-ON TERMINAL PICK
HD-50423 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL 1
Separating Connector
See Figure A-49. Using a small screwdriver, move the slide to
the unlocked position, which is signaled by a click.
ed04014
2
2
3
3
1. Unlock the slide
2. Push the connector together
3. Lock the slide
Figure A-50. Mating Connector
Terminal Removal
4
1. See Figure A-51. Insert a small screwdriver into the recess
to unlock the secondary lock. Move the secondary lock to
the unlocked position.
2. Select the 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL (PART
1. Screwdriver NUMBER: HD-50423) for small terminals or the SNAP-ON
2. Slide in locked position TERMINAL PICK (PART NUMBER: GA500A) for large
3. Slide in unlocked position terminals.
4. Connector housing
3. Insert the terminal extractor tool into the two slots of the
Figure A-49. Separating Connector terminal cavity until the tool stops.
Mating Connector NOTE

By pushing the wire gently toward the terminal removal tool,
See Figure A-50. With the slide in the unlocked position, push the unlocking procedure will be easier. After the terminal has
the connector together. Push the slide to the locked position. been removed from the connector, use a hobby knife to bend
the locking tabs outward.
4. With the terminal extractor tool in place, remove the

terminal by pulling on the wire.
94000390 A-33
ed04016
NOTE
• The secondary lock does not detect the correct position of
2 the terminal in the cavity.
• Correct terminal location must be verified before the
secondary lock is activated.
3 • The connector can be mated when both the secondary lock
and slide are in the locked position.
1
ed04017
4
2
1
5
6
1. Secondary lock in locked position

2. Screwdriver
3. Slide in unlocked position
4. Secondary lock in unlocked position
5. Removal tool HD-50423
6. Removal tool GA-500A
7. Push wire toward terminal removal tool
4
8. Remove terminal
Figure A-51. Terminal Removal
1. Large terminal
Installing Terminal 2. Small terminal
3. Screwdriver
1. See Figure A-52. Terminals can only be inserted when the 4. Slide in the locked position
secondary lock is in the unlocked position.
Figure A-52. Inserting Terminal
2. Verify that the terminals are correctly orientated to the
connector. Replacement and Repair
3. Insert the terminals into the cavity of the connector. Verify The terminals and connector assemblies are not repairable.
the terminal crimps and single wire seals slide completely Discard and replace any defective or damaged terminals or
in the cavity. connector assemblies. Do not reuse a terminal by removing
4. Using a screwdriver, move the secondary lock into the the wire.
locked position, which is signaled by a click.
A-34 94000390
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
B.1 LENGTH CONVERSION ...................................................................................................... B-1
B.2 FLUID CONVERSION .......................................................................................................... B-2
B.3 TORQUE CONVERSION ..................................................................................................... B-3
B.4 GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................... B-4
APPENDIX B REFERENCE
NOTES
LENGTH CONVERSION B.1
CONVERSION TABLE
Table B-1. Metric Conversions
MILLIMETERS to INCHES INCHES to MILLIMETERS
(MM x 0.03937 = IN) (IN x 25.40 = MM)
mm in mm in mm in mm in in mm in mm in mm in mm
.1 .0039 25 .9842 58 2.283 91 3.582 .001 .025 .6 15.240 1-15/16 49.21 3-5/16 84.14
.2 .0078 26 1.024 59 2.323 92 3.622 .002 .051 5/8 15.875 2 50.80 3-3/8 85.72
.3 .0118 27 1.063 60 2.362 93 3.661 .003 .076 11/16 17.462 2-1/16 52.39 3.4 86.36
.4 .0157 28 1.102 61 2.401 94 3.701 .004 .102 .7 17.780 2.1 53.34 3-7/16 87.31
.5 .0197 29 1.142 62 2.441 95 3.740 .005 .127 3/4 19.050 2-1/8 53.97 3-1/2 88.90
.6 .0236 30 1.181 63 2.480 96 3.779 .006 .152 .8 20.320 2-3/16 55.56 3-9/16 90.49
.7 .0275 31 1.220 64 2.519 97 3.819 .007 .178 13/16 20.638 2.2 55.88 3.6 91.44
.8 .0315 32 1.260 65 2.559 98 3.858 .008 .203 7/8 22.225 2-1/4 57.15 3-5/8 92.07
.9 .0354 33 1.299 66 2.598 99 3.897 .009 .229 .9 22.860 2.3 58.42 3-11/16 93.66
1 .0394 34 1.338 67 2.638 100 3.937 .010 .254 15/16 23.812 2-5/16 58.74 3.7 93.98
2 .0787 35 1.378 68 2.677 101 3.976 1/64 .397 1 25.40 2-3/8 60.32 3-3/4 95.25
3 .1181 36 1.417 69 2.716 102 4.016 .020 .508 1-1/16 26.99 2.4 60.96 3.8 96.52
4 .1575 37 1.456 70 2.756 103 4.055 .030 .762 1.1 27.94 2-7/16 61.91 3-13/16 96.84
5 .1968 38 1.496 71 2.795 104 4.094 1/32 .794 1-1/8 28.57 2-1/2 63.50 3-7/8 98.42
6 .2362 39 1.535 72 2.834 105 4.134 .040 1.016 1-3/16 30.16 2-9/16 65.09 3.9 99.06
7 .2756 40 1.575 73 2.874 106 4.173 .050 1.270 1.2 30.48 2.6 66.04 3-15/16 100.01
8 .3149 41 1.614 74 2.913 107 4.212 .060 1.524 1-1/4 31.75 2-5/8 66.67 4 101.6
9 .3543 42 1.653 75 2.953 108 4.252 1/16 1.588 1.3 33.02 2-11/16 68.26 4-1/16 102.19
10 .3937 43 1.693 76 2.992 109 4.291 .070 1.778 1-5/16 33.34 2.7 68.58 4.1 104.14
11 .4331 44 1.732 77 3.031 110 4.331 .080 2.032 1-3/8 34.92 2-3/4 69.85 4-1/8 104.77
12 .4724 45 1.772 78 3.071 111 4.370 .090 2.286 1.4 35.56 2.8 71.12 4-3/16 106.36
13 .5118 46 1.811 79 3.110 112 4.409 .1 2.540 1-7/16 36.51 2-13/16 71.44 4.2 106.68
14 .5512 47 1.850 80 3.149 113 4.449 1/8 3.175 1-1/2 38.10 2-7/8 73.02 4-1/4 107.95
15 .5905 48 1.890 81 3.189 114 4.488 3/16 4.762 1-9/16 39.69 2.9 73.66 4.3 109.22
16 .6299 49 1.929 82 3.228 115 4.527 .2 5.080 1.6 40.64 2-15/16 74.61 4-5/16 109.54
17 .6693 50 1.968 83 3.268 116 4.567 1/4 6.350 1-5/8 41.27 3 76.20 4-3/8 111.12
18 .7086 51 2.008 84 3.307 117 4.606 .3 7.620 1-11/16 42.86 3-1/16 77.79 4.4 111.76
19 .7480 52 2.047 85 3.346 118 4.645 5/16 7.938 1.7 43.18 3.1 78.74 4-7/16 112.71
20 .7874 53 2.086 86 3.386 119 4.685 3/8 9.525 1-3/4 44.45 3-1/8 79.37 4-1/2 114.30
21 .8268 54 2.126 87 3.425 120 4.724 .4 10.160 1.8 45.72 3-3/16 80.96 4-9/16 115.89
22 .8661 55 2.165 88 3.464 121 4.764 7/16 11.112 1-13/16 46.04 3.2 81.28 4.6 116.84
23 .9055 56 2.205 89 3.504 122 4.803 1/2 12.700 1-7/8 47.62 3-1/4 82.55 4-5/8 117.47
24 .9449 57 2.244 90 3.543 123 4.842 9/16 14.288 1.9 48.26 3.3 83.82 4-11/16 119.06
94000390 B-1
FLUID CONVERSION B.2
UNITED STATES SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified, all fluid volume measurements in

this manual are expressed in United States (U.S.)
units-of-measure. See below:
• 1 pint (U.S.) = 16 fluid ounces (U.S.)

• 1 quart (U.S.) = 2 pints (U.S.) = 32 fl. oz. (U.S.)
• 1 gallon (U.S.) = 4 quarts (U.S.) = 128 fl. oz. (U.S.)
METRIC SYSTEM
Fluid volume measurements in this manual include the metric

system equivalents. In the metric system, 1 liter (L) = 1,000
milliliters (mL). To convert between U.S. units-of-measure and
metric units-of-measure, refer to the following:
• fluid ounces (U.S.) x 29.574 = milliliters

• pints (U.S.) x 0.473 = liters
• quarts (U.S.) x 0.946 = liters
• gallons (U.S.) x 3.785 = liters
• milliliters x 0.0338 = fluid ounces (U.S.)
• liters x 2.114 = pints (U.S.)
• liters x 1.057 = quarts (U.S.)
• liters x 0.264 = gallons (U.S.)
BRITISH IMPERIAL SYSTEM
Fluid volume measurements in this manual do not include the

British Imperial (Imp.) system equivalents. The following
conversions exist in the British Imperial system:
• 1 pint (Imp.) = 20 fluid ounces (Imp.)

• 1 quart (Imp.) = 2 pints (Imp.)
• 1 gallon (Imp.) = 4 quarts (Imp.)
Although the same unit-of-measure terminology as the U.S.

system is used in the British Imperial (Imp.) system, the actual
volume of each British Imperial unit-of-measure differs from its
U.S. counterpart. The U.S. fluid ounce is larger than the British
Imperial fluid ounce. However, the U.S. pint, quart, and gallon
are smaller than the British Imperial pint, quart, and gallon,
respectively. To convert between U.S. units and British Imperial
units, refer to the following:
• fluid ounces (U.S.) x 1.042 = fluid ounces (Imp.)

• pints (U.S.) x 0.833 = pints (Imp.)
• quarts (U.S.) x 0.833 = quarts (Imp.)
• gallons (U.S.) x 0.833 = gallons (Imp.)
• fluid ounces (Imp.) x 0.960 = fluid ounces (U.S.)
• pints (Imp.) x 1.201 = pints (U.S.)
• quarts (Imp.) x 1.201 = quarts (U.S.)
• gallons (Imp.) x 1.201 = gallons (U.S.)
B-2 94000390
TORQUE CONVERSION B.3
UNITED STATES SYSTEM
The U.S. units of torque, foot pounds and inch pounds, are
used in this manual. To convert units, use the following
equations:
• foot pounds (ft-lbs) X 12.00000 = inch pounds (in-lbs)

• inch pounds (in-lbs) X 0.08333 = foot pounds (ft-lbs)
METRIC SYSTEM
All metric torque specifications are written in Newton-meters

(Nm). To convert metric to United States units and United
States to metric, use the following equations:
• Newton meters (Nm) X 0.737563 = foot pounds (ft-lbs)

• Newton meters (Nm) X 8.85085 = inch pounds (in-lbs)
• foot pounds (ft-lbs) X 1.35582 = Newton meters (Nm)
• inch pounds (in-lbs) X 0.112985 = Newton meters (Nm)
94000390 B-3
GLOSSARY B.4
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Table B-2. Acronyms and Abbreviations
ACRONYM OR ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
A Amperes
AAT Ambient air temperature
ABS Anti-lock braking system
AC Alternating current
ACC Accessory position on ignition switch
ACR Automatic compression release
AGM Absorbed glass mat (battery)
Ah Ampere-hour
AIS Active intake solenoid
AWG American wire gauge
B+ Battery voltage
bar Bar
BAS Bank angle sensor
BCM Body control module
BOB Breakout box
BTDC Before top dead center
°C Celsius (Centigrade)
CA California
CAL Calibration
CAN Controller area network
CB Tx CB send transmission
CB Rx CB receive transmission
cc Cubic centimeters
CCA Cold cranking amps
CCW Counterclockwise
CKP Crankshaft position
cm Centimeters
cm3 Cubic centimeters
CW Clockwise
DC Direct current
DLC Data link connector
DOM Domestic
DOT Department of Transportation
DTC Diagnostic trouble code
DVOM Digital volt ohm meter
ECM Electronic control module
ECT Engine coolant temperature
ECU Electronic control unit
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
EFI Electronic fuel injection
EHCU Electro hydraulic control unit
ET Engine temperature
ETC Electronic throttle control
B-4 94000390
EVAP Evaporative emissions control system
°F Fahrenheit
fl oz Fluid ounce
FPS Fuel pressure sensor
ft Feet
ft-lbs Foot pounds
FTP Flash to pass
g Gram
gal Gallon
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GND Ground (electrical)
GPS Global positioning system
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
HCU Hydraulic control unit
HDI Harley-Davidson International
HD-Link Networking system
H-DSSS Harley-Davidson smart security system
HFM Hands-free mode
HFSM Hands-free security module
Hg Mercury
H02S Heated oxygen sensor
hp Horsepower
hr Hour
IAC Idle air control
IAT Intake air temperature
IC Instrument cluster
ID Inside diameter
IGN Ignition light/key switch position
IM Instrument module
in inch
in3 Cubic inch
INJ PW Injector pulse width
INTCM Intercom
in-lbs Inch pounds
JSS Jiffy stand sensor
kg Kilogram
km Kilometer
km/h Kilometers per hour
kPa Kilopascal
kW Kilowatt
KS Knock sensor
L Liter
lb Pounds
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
94000390 B-5
LH Left hand
LHCM Left hand control module
LP License plate
LT Left
mA Milliampere
MAP Manifold absolute pressure
max Maximum
mi Mile
min Minimum
mL Milliliter
mm Millimeter
mph Miles per hour
ms Millisecond
Nm Newton-meter
NIM Navigation interface module
NiMH Nickel metal hydride
N/A Not applicable
O2 Oxygen
OD Outside diameter
OEM Original equipment manufacturer
oz Ounce
P&A Parts and Accessories
Part No. Part number
PIN Personal identification number
PND Personal navigation device
psi Pounds per square inch
PWM signal Pulse width modulated signal
qt Quart
RAD Radio
RCM Reverse control module
RDS Radio data system
RES Reserve mark on fuel supply valve
RH Right hand
RHCM Right hand control module
rpm Revolutions per minute
RT Right
s Seconds
SCFH Cubic feet per hour at standard conditions
SDARS Satellite digital audio radio service
SPDO Speedometer
SPKR Speaker
STT Stop/tail/turn
TA Traffic announcement
TCA Throttle control actuator
TDC Top dead center
B-6 94000390
TGS Twist grip sensor
TPMS Tire pressure monitoring system
TPS Throttle position sensor
TSM Turn signal module
TSSM Turn signal/security module
TT Telltale
USB Universal serial bus
V Volt
VAC Volts of alternating current
VDC Volts of direct current
VIN Vehicle identification number
VR Voice recognition
VSS Vehicle speed sensor
W Watt
WA Weather alert
WSS Wheel speed sensor
94000390 B-7
NOTES
TOOLS
PART NUMBER TOOL NAME NOTES
B-50085 TERMINAL EXTRACTOR 7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, DTC
B1432
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, DTC
B1442
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, Left
Fairing Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio
Fairing Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, Right
B1422
B1432
B1442
Saddlebag Woofer Speaker Low or No Audio
Saddlebag Tweeter/Mid Speaker Low or No Audio
GA500A SNAP-ON TERMINAL PICK A.5 TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR, Tyco
HDSC Sealed Connector Repair
HD-34730-2E FUEL INJECTOR TEST LIGHT 7.16 REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
TOOLS
B2151
7.16 REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
B2156
HD-41404 TEST CONNECTOR KIT 7.14 No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140, No Vehicle
Power, DTC U0140
7.15 Power Lock Diagnostics, DTC B2188
7.15 Power Lock Diagnostics, Power Locks Dash
Switch Inoperative
B2151
B2153, B2154
B2156
B2158, B2159
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, Stop Lamp
Inoperative
Always On, DTC B2223
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, DTC B2161
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, DTC B2163,
B2164
7.18 RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, Running
Lamps Inoperative
7.18 RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
B2168, B2169
7.18 RUNNING LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, License
Plate Lamp Inoperative
94000390 I
TOOLS
7.21 AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
B1401
7.22 RADIO DIAGNOSTICS, DTC B1337
B1410
B1411
B1412
B1413
B1420
B1421
B1422
B1423
B1430
B1431
B1432
B1433
B1440
B1441
B1442
B1443
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, All
Speakers Inoperative
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1, Both
Left Speakers Low or No Audio
Right Speakers Low or No Audio
B1410
B1411
B1412
B1413
B1420
II 94000390
TOOLS
B1421
B1422
B1423
B1430
B1431
B1432
B1433
B1440
B1441
B1442
B1443
HD-42682 BREAKOUT BOX 7.15 Power Lock Diagnostics, Power Locks Dash
Switch Inoperative
HD-44687 IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST ADAPTER 7.16 REAR TURN SIGNAL DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
B2151
B2156
HD-46601 BREAKOUT BOX ADAPTERS 7.15 Power Lock Diagnostics, Power Locks Dash
Switch Inoperative
HD-47918 ADVANCED AUDIO SYSTEM BREAKOUT BOX 7.21 AUDIO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTICS, DTC
B1401
B1410
B1411
B1412
B1413
B1420
B1421
B1422
B1423
B1430
B1431
B1432
B1433
94000390 III
TOOLS
B1440
B1441
B1442
B1443
B1410
B1411
B1412
B1413
B1420
B1421
B1422
B1423
B1430
B1431
B1432
B1433
B1440
B1441
B1442
B1443
IV 94000390
TOOLS
HD-48650 DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II , Preparation For Service
2.5 WHEELS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
7.12 POWER LOCKS, KEY FOB
7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, Description and
Operation
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, Description and
Operation
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, DTCs C2000, C2001,
C2003, C2004
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, DTCs C2006, C2007
7.23 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 1,
Description and Operation
7.24 AUDIO DIAGNOSTICS AMPLIFIER 2,
Description and Operation
HD-50390-1 BREAKOUT BOX 7.14 No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140, No Vehicle
Power, DTC U0140
7.15 Power Lock Diagnostics, Power Locks
Inoperative
B2151
B2153, B2154
B2156
B2158, B2159
Inoperative
B2164
Lamps Inoperative
B2168, B2169
94000390 V
TOOLS
HD-50390-2 BCM CABLE 7.14 No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140, No Vehicle
Power, DTC U0140
Inoperative
B2151
B2153, B2154
B2156
B2158, B2159
Inoperative
B2164
Lamps Inoperative
B2168, B2169
HD-50390-2-P BCM OVERLAY 7.14 No Vehicle Power, DTC U0140, No Vehicle
Power, DTC U0140
Inoperative
VI 94000390
TOOLS
B2151
B2153, B2154
B2156
B2158, B2159
Inoperative
B2164
Lamps Inoperative
B2168, B2169
HD-50423 0.6 MM TERMINAL EXTACTOR TOOL 7.17 STOP LAMP DIAGNOSTICS, Stop Lamp
A.5 TYCO HDSC SEALED CONNECTOR, Tyco
HDSC Sealed Connector Repair
HD-51656 DIN CONNECTOR TOOL 7.9 Radio, Rider Headset Connector
HD-51794 TPMS ACTIVATION TOOL 2.5 WHEELS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, Description and
Operation
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, DTC C0077
7.20 TPMS DIAGNOSTICS, DTCs C2000, C2001,
C2003, C2004
94000390 VII
NOTES
Torque Values
ABS caddy screw 36–40 in-lbs 4.1–4.5 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Air cleaner backplate screws 55–60 in-lbs 6.2–6.8 N·m 4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE AS-
SEMBLY, Install
Air cleaner breather bolts 22–24 ft-lbs 29.8–32.5 N·m 4.2 AIR CLEANER BACKPLATE AS-
SEMBLY, Install
Air cleaner insert screw 27–32 in-lbs 3.1–3.6 N·m 1.3 Air Filter Element, Install
Air filter element screws 120–144 in-lbs 13.6–16.3 N·m 1.3 Air Filter Element, Install
Amplifier bracket screws 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier mounting nuts 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier mounting screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–4 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier studs 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 7.10 Audio Amplifier, Installation
Amplifier, rear, screw 15–20 in-lbs 1.7–2.3 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Rear Amp-
lifier
Axle cover set screw 60–84 in-lbs 6.8–9.5 N·m 2.6 FRONT AXLE COVERS, Replacement
LOCTITE 262 HIGH STRENGTH
THREADLOCKER AND SEALANT (red)
Battery tray screws 72–96 in-lbs 8.1–10.8 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Brake disc screws, front 16–24 ft-lbs 21.7–32.5 N·m 2.5 WHEELS, Front Wheel Service
Always use new screws
Brake pedal cover screws 12–15 ft-lbs 16.2–20.3 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Rear Brake Pedal Pad
Console medallion lamp screws 20–30 in-lbs 2.3–3.4 N·m 7.3 FUEL TANK CONSOLE LAMP,
Lighted Fuel Tank Emblem
TORQUE-VALUES
Dash panel screws 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m 7.7 DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES, Install-
ation
Footboard bracket screws, rider 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–57 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Rider Footboards
Footboard pivot bolt nut, rider 60–80 in-lbs 6.8–9 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Rider Footboards
Footboard wear peg 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Rider Footboards
Footrest cover screw, passenger 15–20 ft-lbs 20.3–27.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Passenger Footrests
Footrest support lower screw, passenger 48–72 in-lbs 5.4–8.1 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Passenger Footrests
Footrest support upper screw, passenger 36–42 ft-lbs 48.8–56.9 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Passenger Footrests
Fork lock screws 36–60 in-lbs 4.1–6.8 N·m 7.6 Fork Lock, Fork Lock
Handlebar switch housing screws 35–45 in-lbs 4.9–5.1 N·m 2.8 Hand grips, Left Hand Grip
Headset DIN connector 7–9 in-lbs 0.8–1 N·m 7.9 Radio, Rider Headset Connector
Ignition coil screws 32–40 in-lbs 3.6–4.5 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Latch handle screw 45–55 in-lbs 5.1–6.2 N·m 2.13 SADDLEBAGS, Latch Handle Remov-
al and Installation
License plate lamp connector cover nut 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5.1 N·m 2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET
ASSEMBLY, Installation
License plate lamp cover screw 57–69 in-lbs 6.4–7.8 N·m 2.11 LICENSE PLATE LAMP/BRACKET
ASSEMBLY, Installation
Muffler end cap fasteners 84–108 in-lbs 9.5–12.2 N·m 2.14 MUFFLER END CAP, Replacement
Muffler shield clamps 20–40 in-lbs 2.3–4.5 N·m 2.14 MUFFLER END CAP, Replacement
Pillion seat bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m 2.9 SEAT, Seat and Pillion
94000390 IX
Torque Values
Rear fascia flange nuts 30–45 in-lbs 3.4–5 N·m 2.10 REAR FASCIA, Installation
Rear fascia lamp screws 14–18 in-lbs 1.6–2 N·m 7.5 Rear Lighting, Rear Fascia Lamp
Relay connector screws 25–35 in-lbs 2.8–3.9 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Relay Bracket
Saddlebag actuator screws 30–35 in-lbs 3.4–3.9 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Actuator: Saddle-
bag
Saddlebag cam screw 25–30 in-lbs 2.8–3.4 N·m 7.12 POWER LOCKS, Actuator: Saddle-
bag
Saddlebag harness connector screws 35–40 in-lbs 4–4.5 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag
Audio Harness Removal and Installation
Saddlebag speaker grille screw 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag
Speakers
Saddlebag speaker screw 10–15 in-lbs 1.1–1.7 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Saddlebag
Speakers
Shift lever clamp screws 18–22 ft-lbs 24.4–29.8 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Shift Levers
Shift lever peg fastener 14–16 ft-lbs 19–21.7 N·m 2.4 FOOTBOARDS AND CONTROLS,
Shift Levers
Tail lamp lens screws 20–24 in-lbs 2.3–2.7 N·m 7.5 Rear Lighting, Tail Lamp Lens: Cana-
dian Models
Tweeter and midrange speaker assembly 9–13 in-lbs 1–1.4 N·m 7.11 Premium Sound System, Front Fair-
screws ing Speakers
Valve stem, 90 degree with sensor 54–62 in-lbs 6–7 N·m 2.5 WHEELS, Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
XM antenna bracket screw 40–60 in-lbs 4.5–6.8 N·m 7.9 Radio, XM Antenna and Bracket
X 94000390
Index
A Fuel.....................................................................................2-2
Fuel Pump Location.........................................................A-30
Acronyms and Abbreviations.............................................B-4 Fuse Block Location.........................................................A-30
Advanced Audio Amplifier................................................7-11
Advanced Audio Radio................................................7-8, 7-8
Advanced Audio System.............................7-8, 7-9, 7-9, 7-11 G
Air Cleaner Assembly..................................................4-2, 4-2
Air Filter Assembly.......................................................1-5, 4-2 GND 1 Location................................................................A-30
Air Filter Element.........................................................1-5, 4-2 GND 2 Location................................................................A-30
Amplifier and Control Assembly Location........................A-30 Glossary.............................................................................B-4
B H
Brake Disc, Front................................................................2-9 Hand Grips..............................................................2-13, 2-14

Handgrips.........................................................................2-13
Handlebar Grips................................................................2-14
C Handlebars..............................................................2-12, 2-13
Head Lamp Location........................................................A-30
Capacities...........................................................................2-2 Headset Connector, Rider................................................7-10
Checking Fasteners............................................................1-2
Connectors...............................................................A-1, A-23
Console...............................................................................7-3 I
Console Emblem Lamp......................................................7-3
Console Harness Location...............................................A-30 Ignition Switch and Fork Lock.............................................7-6
Console Insert.....................................................................7-3 Ignition/Light Key Switch and Fork Lock.............................7-6
Conversions........................................................B-1, B-2, B-3
Coolant...............................................................................2-2
Covers: HDI......................................................................2-11 K
Key Fob............................................................................7-17
D
INDEX
DLC Location....................................................................A-30 L
DTC Priority Table..............7-24, 7-37, 7-41, 7-46, 7-54, 7-56
LED Console Location......................................................A-30
Dash Panel and Switches...........................................7-7, 7-7
LED Turn Signal Lamp.......................................................7-4
Drive...................................................................................5-1
LHCM Location.................................................................A-30
License Plate Lamp/Bracket....................................2-17, 2-17
E Loctite....................................................................................II
Lubricants, Greases, Sealants (Table)...............................1-2
ECM Location...................................................................A-30
Electrical Protection............................................................7-2
Engine.........................................................................1-6, 3-1 M
Engine Lubrication..............................................................1-6
Maintenance.......................................................................1-2
Engine Oil...........................................................................2-2
Maintenance Schedule.......................................................1-2
Maintenance Specifications................................................1-2
F Metric System.....................................................................B-2
Muffler End Cap................................................................2-21
Fairing Cap and Switches...........................................7-7, 7-7
Fascia, Rear.....................................................2-16, 2-16, 7-5
Fender (Rear)..........................................................2-18, 2-18 P
Fender, Rear............................................................2-18, 2-18
Power Lock Diagnostics...................................................7-28
Fluid Conversions...............................................................B-2
Power Locks............................................................7-16, 7-28
Fluids and Lubricants..........................................................1-2
Premium Audio System...........................................7-13, 7-14
Footboards and Controls.............................................2-7, 2-8
Primary Chaincase.............................................................2-2
Foreword.................................................................................I
Fork Lock............................................................................7-6
Front ACR Location..........................................................A-30 Q
Front Axle Covers.............................................................2-11
Front Brake Disc.................................................................2-9 Quick Reference Chart.......................................................1-2
Front Fuel Injector Location..............................................A-30 Quick Reference Data........................................................1-2
Front HCU Location..........................................................A-30
Front WSS Location.........................................................A-30
Front Wheel........................................................................2-9
XI
Index
R V
RHCM Location................................................................A-30 V.I.N....................................................................................2-4

Radio.............................................................7-8, 7-9, 7-9, 7-9 VIN......................................................................................2-4
Radio Software Update.......................................................7-8 VIN codes...........................................................................2-4
Rear ACR Location..........................................................A-30 Valve Stem..........................................................................2-9
Rear Facia...............................................................2-16, 2-16 Vehicle Identification Number.............................................2-4
Rear Fascia.............................................................2-16, 2-16 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....................................2-4
Rear Fascia Lamps.................................................2-16, 2-16
Rear Fender.................................2-18, 2-18, 2-18, 2-18, 2-18
Rear Fuel Injector Location..............................................A-30 W
Reference...........................................................................1-2
Relays...............................................................................7-18 Weight Limits......................................................................2-2
Running Lamps Description.............................................7-46 Wheel..........................................................................2-9, 2-9
Running Lamps Diagnostics.............................................7-48 Wiring.................................................................................A-3
Wiring Diagram Symbols....................................................A-3
S
X
SPX Kent-Moore....................................................................II
Saddlebag......................................................2-19, 2-19, 2-20 XM Radio Diagnostics......................................................7-50
Saddlebags..............................................................2-19, 2-19 XM Satellite Radio.....................................................7-9, 7-10
Safety..................................................................................2-2
Seat.........................................................................2-15, 2-18
Security Antenna Location...............................................A-30
Security System................................................................7-17
Service Aids........................................................................1-2
Service Bulletins.....................................................................I
Service Preparation................................................................I
Service Wear Limits............................................................3-2
Shock Absorber..................................................................1-7
Special Tools..........................................................................II
Specifications.................................1-2, 1-6, 2-2, 3-1, 3-1, 6-1
Specifications: Chassis.......................................................2-2
Specifications: Drive...........................................................5-1
Specifications: Transmission..............................................6-1
Speedometer Location.....................................................A-30
Stop Lamp Diagnostics.....................................................7-42
Stop Lamps Operation......................................................7-41
Switch Housing........................................................2-13, 2-14
Symptoms.........................................................................7-22
TCA Location....................................................................A-30
TGS Location...................................................................A-30
TMAP Location.................................................................A-30
Tire......................................................................................2-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........................2-9
Tire Pressures....................................................................2-2
Tire Replacement (TPMS)..................................................2-9
Tires....................................................................................2-2
Torque Conversion.............................................................B-3
Trademarks........................................................................II, II
Transmission...............................................................2-2, 6-1
Transmission Lubrication....................................................2-2
Troubleshooting..................................................................3-3
Twist Grip..........................................................................2-14
Tyco HDSC Sealed Connectors.......................................A-33
XII
INSIDE BACK COVER GOES HERE
OUTSIDE BACK COVER GOES HERE

2017 Supplemental SM FLHXSE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 Supplemental SM FLHXSE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FLHXSE MODELS

2017 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SERVICE

Harley-Davidson Motor Company

Printed in the U.S.A.

VISIT THE HARLE Y-DAVIDSON WEB SITE

Please tell us how we can improve this manual.

Name: Dealer ship:

Street: Depar tment:

City: State: Zip:

Please clip out and mail to:

NOTE Good preparation is very important for efficient service work.

Read and follow warnings and directions on all products.

TABLE OF CONTENTS III

TABLE OF CONTENTS VII

TABLE OF CONTENTS VIII

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE NOTES

For Asia-Pacific air filter assembly, see the service manual.

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE

1. See Figure 1-1. Install air filter element (5).

a. Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH

c. Tighten to 120–144 in-lbs (13.6–16.3 N·m).

2. Install insert (2).

a. Secure insert with screws (1).

b. Tighten to 27–32 in-lbs (3.1–3.6 N·m).

• Increase preload to accommodate the total load on the

3. Refer to Table 1-4. Rotate the knob clockwise the

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE NOTES

When lifting a motorcycle using a jack, be sure jack

3. Install locknuts (2) onto pivot screws. Tighten to

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE

3. Rotate pegs for rider posture. Tighten to 14–16 ft-lbs NOTE

4. Align marks made during disassembly and position shift

5. Tighten clamp screws to 18–22 ft-lbs (24.4–29.8 N·m).

Install Support and Footrest

3 2. Install footrest support with screws (6, 11) and lockwasher

3. Install pivot, spring washer, locknut and passenger footrest

2. See Figure 2-6. Apply LOCTITE 243 MEDIUM STRENGTH

3. Install pad assembly with screw (2) Position for passenger

4. Tighten to 15–20 ft-lbs (20.3–27.1 N·m).

Remove Footrest and Support

1. Install new valve stem/seal assembly in wheel.

a. Install sensor and spring with nut (5). Position valve

3. New sensor: Before riding motorcycle, assign using TPMS sm08492

b. Go to Toolbox > Vehicle Setup > TPMS > Configure. 4

c. Follow the online instructions to configure system to

1. Break the bead being careful to not damage tire pressure

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE

1. See Figure 2-10. Loosen set screw. Remove cover.

2. Remove set screw from cover.

3. Liberally apply LOCTITE 262 HIGH STRENGTH

4. Install cover with set screw. Tighten to 60–84 in-lbs

5. Repeat steps for the opposite side.

Figure 2-10. Front Axle Cover Set Screw

Handlebar servicing is essentially the same as the Touring

FASTENER TORQUE VALUE

5. Tighten the switch housing screws in the following order

a. Upper switch housing screw

b. Lower switch housing screw

6. See the service manual to complete installation.

7. Complete assembly. See DASH PANEL AND SWITCHES

Figure 2-11. Sleeve Rubber Step to Switch Assembly Notch

Figure 2-13. Alignment Dimples

1. Visually align the right grip with the left grip.

2. Loosely install right switch control housing and front brake